Panasonic of North America CA-170-CTPLHS CA-170-CTPL-HS radio with BT, Navigation and Integrated Display User Manual Can be modified by macros
Panasonic Corporation of North America CA-170-CTPL-HS radio with BT, Navigation and Integrated Display Can be modified by macros
Users manual
INTRODUCTION/WELCOME
WELCOME FROM FCA US LLC .......3
CONTROLS AT A GLANCE
DRIVERCOCKPIT ...............6
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER ...........8
GETTING STARTED
VEHICLE USER GUIDE (U.S. MARKET ONLY)
.........................10
KEYFOB ...................11
REMOTESTART ...............14
TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE .......15
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — PASSIVE
ENTRY .....................16
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — IGNITION . . . 18
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM ........19
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ....20
HEAD RESTRAINTS .............49
SEATING ....................51
HEATED STEERING WHEEL ........60
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
.........................61
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE BREAK-IN
RECOMMENDATIONS ............63
TURN SIGNAL/WIPER/WASHER/HIGH BEAM
LEVER .....................67
HEADLIGHT SWITCH ............68
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL ......69
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ....72
LANESENSE .................78
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA . . . 79
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST .....80
BLIND SPOT MONITORING .........80
EIGHT-SPEED AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION ...............82
AUTOSTICK/STEERING WHEEL MOUNTED
PADDLE SHIFTERS ..............84
SPORT MODE — WITHOUT PERFORMANCE
CONTROL ...................86
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROLS .......87
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS (ATC)
.........................89
POWER SUNROOF ..............91
WIND BUFFETING ..............92
ELECTRONICS
YOUR VEHICLE'S SOUND SYSTEM ....94
CYBERSECURITY ...............95
IDENTIFYING YOUR RADIO .........96
SIRIUSXM GUARDIAN ............98
UCONNECT 5.0 ...............107
UCONNECT 5.0 VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK
TIPS .....................111
UCONNECT 8.4/8.4 NAV ..........117
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK
TIPS .....................136
UCONNECT PHONE ............148
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS . 156
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY ....156
PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES .......161
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER . . 162
POWEROUTLET ..............164
UTILITY
TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS (MAXIMUM
TRAILERWEIGHTRATINGS) .......167
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME,ETC.) ............168
SRT
DRIVE MODES ................169
SRT PERFORMANCE FEATURES .....170
SUMMER/THREE-SEASON TIRES ....174
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE ..........175
WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS . . . 175
IFYOURENGINEOVERHEATS ......182
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING .....183
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED . . . 189
BATTERY LOCATION ............195
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES .....195
MANUAL PARK RELEASE — 8 SPEED
TRANSMISSION ..............198
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE .....199
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE .......200
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS) ....................201
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) .....201
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
OPENING THE HOOD ...........202
ENGINECOMPARTMENT—3.6L ....204
ENGINECOMPARTMENT—5.7L ....206
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 6.2L
SUPERCHARGED ..............208
ENGINECOMPARTMENT—6.4L ....210
FLUID CAPACITIES — NON-SRT .....212
FLUID CAPACITIES — SRT ........212
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS
—NON-SRT .................213
SRT FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE
PARTS ....................215
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES ......216
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE —
NON-SRT ...................216
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE — SRT . . . 224
FUSES ....................231
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION .......236
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION . . . 242
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES ....245
FUEL DOOR RELEASE ..........246
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Draft Manual
FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) — IF
EQUIPPED .................248
REPLACEMENT BULBS ..........248
CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
FCA US LLC CUSTOMER CENTER ....250
FCA CANADA INC. CUSTOMER CENTER
........................250
ASSISTANCE FOR THE HEARING IMPAIRED
........................250
PUBLICATIONS ORDERING ........250
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS IN THE
UNITEDSTATES ..............251
MOPAR® ACCESSORIES
AUTHENTIC ACCESSORIES BY MOPAR . 252
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
FAQ’s .....................253
INDEX
......................0
TABLE OF CONTENTS
2
WELCOME FROM FCA US LLC
Congratulations on selecting your new FCA US LLC (“FCA US”) vehicle. Be assured that
it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality.
Your new FCA US vehicle has characteristics to enhance the driver's control under some
driving conditions. These are to assist the driver and are never a substitute for attentive
driving. They can never take the driver's place. Always drive carefully.
Your new vehicle has many features for the comfort and convenience of you and your
passengers. Some of these should not be used when driving because they take your eyes
from the road or your attention from driving. Never text while driving or take your eyes,
more than momentarily, off the road.
This guide illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are
either standard or optional on this vehicle. This guide may also include a description of
features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle.
Please disregard any features and equipment described in this guide that are not available
on this vehicle. FCA US reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications
and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
This User Guide has been prepared to help you quickly become acquainted with the
important features of your vehicle. It contains most things you will need to operate and
maintain the vehicle, including emergency information.
The DVD includes a computer application containing detailed Owner's information which
can be viewed on a personal computer or MAC computer. The multimedia DVD also
includes videos which can be played on any standard DVD player (including the Uconnect
Touchscreen Radios if equipped with DVD player capabilities). Additional DVD opera-
tional information is located on the back of the DVD sleeve.
For complete owner information, refer to your Owner's Manual on the DVD in the owner’s
kit provided at the time of new vehicle purchase. For your convenience, the information
contained on the DVD may also be printed and saved for future reference.
FCA US is committed to protecting our environment and natural resources. By converting
from paper to electronic delivery for the majority of the user information for your vehicle,
together we greatly reduce the demand for tree-based products and lessen the stress on
our environment.
INTRODUCTION/WELCOME
3
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be
deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution (excluding legal lines).
WARNING!
• Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and increase the risk
of serious personal injury.
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver foot well while the vehicle
is moving. Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal and accelerator pedal
causing a loss of vehicle control.
• Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or mounting can cause interference
with the brake pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of control of the
vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons.
A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not
to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children.
A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Never use the ‘PARK’ position as a substitute for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible
injury or damage.
• Refer to your Owner's Manual on the DVD for further details.
USE OF AFTERMARKET PRODUCTS (ELECTRONICS)
The use of aftermarket devices including cell phones, MP3 players, GPS systems, or
chargers may affect the performance of on-board wireless features including Keyless
Enter-N-Go and Remote Start range. If you are experiencing difficulties with any of your
wireless features, try disconnecting your aftermarket devices to see if the situation
improves. If your symptoms persist, please see an authorized dealer.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best,
has factory-trained technicians and genuine MOPAR
®
parts, and cares about your
satisfaction.
INTRODUCTION/WELCOME
4
INTRODUCTION/WELCOME
5
DRIVER COCKPIT
1. Driver Memory Seat pg. 52
2. Headlight Switch pg. 68
3. Paddle Shifters pg. 84
4. Instrument Cluster pg. 8
5. Instrument Cluster Display pg. 156
6. Engine Start/Stop Button pg. 18
7. Identify Your Radio pg. 96
8. Glove/Storage Compartment
9. Switch Panel
• Electronic Stability Control (ESC) pg. 178
• Hazard Switch
• Manual Audio Controls
CONTROLS AT A GLANCE
6
10. Climate Controls pg. 87
11. Power Outlet pg. 164
12. Gear Selector pg. 82
13. Speed Control pg. 69
14. Instrument Cluster Display Controls pg. 161
15. Emergency Brake Pedal
16. Power Door Lock Switches
17. Power Window Switches
18. Power Mirrors Switch
CONTROLS AT A GLANCE
7
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
1. Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge
2. Tachometer
3. Instrument Cluster Display
(See page 175 for Instrument Cluster Warning Lights information.)
CONTROLS AT A GLANCE
8
4. Gear Selector Position
5. Speedometer
6. Fuel Filler Location/Fuel Gauge
(See page 0 for Instrument Cluster Indicator Lights information.)
CONTROLS AT A GLANCE
9
VEHICLE USER GUIDE (U.S. MARKET ONLY)
Access your Owner’s Information – right through your Uconnect 8.4 or 8.4 NAV touch-
screen radio — If Equipped (See page 96 for Identifying your radio).
To access the Vehicle User Guide on your Uconnect Touchscreen: Press the Uconnect
Apps button, then press the Vehicle User Guide icon on your touchscreen.
NOTE:
Vehicle User Guide features are not available while the vehicle is moving. If you try to
access while the vehicle is in motion, the system will display: Feature not available while
the vehicle is in motion.
Pre-Installed Features
•Your User Guide — Updated in real-time •Available when and where you need it
•Touchscreen convenience •Customizable interface
•Maintenance schedules and information •Multilingual
•Comprehensive icon & symbol glossary
Once you launch your Vehicle User Guide, you will be able to explore your warranty
information and radio manual when and where you need them. Your Uconnect radio will
display the Vehicle User Guide on your touchscreen radio to assist in better understanding
your vehicle. There’s no app to download, no phone to connect and no external device
needed for playback. Plus, it’s updated throughout the year, in real-time, so it never goes
out of date.
Vehicle User Guide Home Screen
GETTING STARTED
10
Features/Benefits
• Pre-installed on your Uconnect touchscreen radio
• Enhanced search and browsing capability
• Robust NAV application — If Equipped
• Add selected topics to a fast-access Favorites category
• Icon and symbol glossary
• Warranty information
• Crucial driver information and assistance:
•Operating Instructions •Maintenance Schedules
•Warranty Information •Emergency Procedures
•Fluid Level Standards •911 Contact and More
Tip: When viewing a topic, tap the star icon to add it to your Favorites, for easy access in
the future.
KEY FOB
Description Of Key Fob
The key fob contains the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) key fob and an emergency key,
which stores in the rear of the key fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the
key fob go dead. The emergency key is also for locking/unlocking the storage compart-
ment. You can keep the emergency key with you when valet parking.
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch on the back of the key fob
sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand.
Base Key Fob
Enhanced Search And Browsing Capability Icon And Symbol Glossary
GETTING STARTED
11
SRT 392 Key Fob
SRT Hellcat Key Fob
NOTE:
SRT vehicles equipped with the 6.2L Su-
percharged engine come with three key
fobs (two red and one black) that allow for
different engine power levels. Please refer
to the "Drive Modes" in “SRT” section in
this guide for further descriptions.
Base Key Fob
1 — Trunk
2 — Unlock
3 — Lock
4 — Remote Start
5 — Panic Alarm
6 — Emergency Key
SRT 392 Key Fob
1 — Trunk
2 — Unlock
3 — Lock
4 — Remote Start
5 — Panic Alarm
6 — Emergency Key
GETTING STARTED
12
Locking And Unlocking The Doors
Push and release the lock button on the
key fob to lock all doors. The turn signal
lights will flash, and the horn will chirp to
acknowledge the signal.
Push and release the unlock button on
the key fob once to unlock the driver's door
or twice within five seconds to unlock all
doors. The turn signal lights will flash to
acknowledge the unlock signal. The illumi-
nated entry system will also turn on.
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
This feature lets you program the system to
unlock either the driver's door or all doors on
the first push of the unlock button on the
key fob. To change the current setting, refer
to your “Uconnect Settings” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” in your
Owner's Manual on the DVD for further
information.
Opening The Trunk
Push the Trunk Release button on the key fob two times within five seconds to open the
trunk.
Panic Alarm
1. Push the PANIC button once to turn the panic alarm on.
2. Wait approximately three seconds and push the button a second time to turn the panic
alarm off.
Emergency Key
Should the battery in the vehicle or the key fob go dead, there is an emergency key located
in the key fob that can be used for locking and unlocking the doors. To remove the
emergency key, slide the button at the top of the key fob sideways with your thumb and
then pull the key out with your other hand.
SRT Hellcat Key Fob
1 — Trunk
2 — Unlock
3 — Lock
4 — Remote Start
5 — Panic Alarm
6 — Emergency Key
GETTING STARTED
13
WARNING!
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the keyless ignition node is in the "OFF"
mode, remove the key fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons.
A child or others could be severely injured or killed. Children should be warned not
to touch the parking brake, brake pedal, or the transmission gear selector. Do not
leave the key fob inside the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ON/RUN
mode. A child could start the vehicle, operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat
build-up may cause them to be severely injured or killed.
• Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the Remote Start System, windows,
door locks or other controls could cause serious injury or death.
REMOTE START
Push the Remote Start button on the key fob twice within five seconds. Pushing the
Remote Start button a third time shuts the engine off.
To drive the vehicle, push the unlock button and cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN
position.
With Remote Start, the engine will only run for 15 minutes (timeout) unless the ignition
is cycled to the ON/RUN position.
The vehicle must be cycled to the ON/RUN position after two consecutive timeouts.
Emergency Key
GETTING STARTED
14
WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or confined area. Exhaust gas
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is
poisonous and can cause you or others to be severely injured or killed when inhaled.
• Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the Remote Start System, windows,
door locks or other controls could cause you and others to be severely injured or
killed.
TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE
The trunk lid can be released from inside the vehicle by pushing the trunk release button
located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel.
NOTE:
The transmission must be in PARK before the button will operate.
• The trunk lid can be released from outside the vehicle by pushing the trunk button on
the key fob twice within five seconds.
• With the ignition in the ON/RUN position, the Trunk Open symbol will display in the
instrument cluster indicating that the trunk is open. The odometer display will reappear
once the trunk is closed.
• With the ignition in the OFF position or the key removed from the ignition switch, the
Trunk Open symbol will display until the trunk is closed.
• Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” in “Things To Know Before Starting” in
your Owner's Manual on the DVD for further information on trunk operation with the
Passive Entry feature.
Trunk Emergency Release
As a security measure, a Trunk Internal Emergency Release lever is built into the trunk
latching mechanism. In the event of an individual being locked inside the trunk, the trunk
can be simply opened by pulling on the glow-in-the-dark handle attached to the trunk
latching mechanism.
GETTING STARTED
15
WARNING!
Do not allow children to have access to the trunk, either by climbing into the trunk from
outside, or through the inside of the vehicle. Always close the trunk lid when your
vehicle is unattended. Once in the trunk, young children may not be able to escape,
even if they entered through the rear seat. If trapped in the trunk, children can die from
suffocation or heat stroke.
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — PASSIVE ENTRY
Introduction To Keyless Enter-N-Go
The Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the vehicle’s key
fob. This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) and trunk without
having to push the key fob lock or unlock buttons as well as starting and stopping the
vehicle with the push of a button.
To Unlock From The Driver Or Passenger Side
Internal Emergency Trunk Release
GETTING STARTED
16
With a valid key fob located outside the
vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver
or passenger side door handle, lift either
front door handle to unlock the door auto-
matically.
To Lock The Vehicle
Both front door handles have buttons lo-
cated on the outside of the handle. With
one of the vehicle's key fobs located outside
the vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
driver's or passenger front door handle,
push the door handle button to lock all four
doors and trunk.
Do NOT grab the door handle when pushing the lock button. This could unlock the door(s).
NOTE:
• If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed, all doors will unlock when you grab hold
of the front driver's door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver Door 1st Press” and
“Unlock All Doors 1st Press,” refer to the “Uconnect Settings” in your vehicle's
Owner's Manual on the DVD or “Programmable Features” for further information.
• If a key fob is detected in the vehicle when locking the vehicle using the power door
lock switch, the doors will unlock and the horn will chirp three times. On the third
attempt, your key fob can be locked inside the vehicle.
• After pushing the button, you must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock the
vehicle using the door handle. This is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked
by pulling the door handle without the vehicle reacting and unlocking.
• If a Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry door handle has not been used for 72 hours,
the Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry feature for that handle may time out. Pulling
the deactivated front door handle will reactivate the door handle's Keyless Enter-N-Go
— Passive Entry feature.
Lift The Door Handle To Unlock
Push The Door Handle Passive Entry Button
To Lock
Do NOT Grab The Handle When Locking
GETTING STARTED
17
To Enter The Trunk
With a valid key fob located outside the
vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the trunk,
push the button on the right side of appli-
que which is located on the trunk.
Whenever the vehicle is unlocked, you can
enter the trunk by pushing the button on the
right side of the applique.
NOTE:
Please refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go — Pas-
sive Entry” in “Things To Know Before
Starting” in your Owner's Manual on the
DVD for further information.
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO —
IGNITION
Starting
1. Place the gear selector in PARK or NEU-
TRAL.
2. While pushing the brake pedal, push the
ENGINE START/STOP button once. If
the engine fails to start, the starter will
disengage automatically after 10 sec-
onds.
3. To stop the cranking of the engine prior
to the engine starting, push the button
again.
Stopping
1. Place the gear selector in PARK.
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button
once. The ignition switch will return to
the OFF position.
If the gear selector is not in PARK, the ENGINE START/STOP button must be held for two
seconds and vehicle speed must be above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine will shut off.
Trunk Passive Entry Button
Engine START/STOP Button
GETTING STARTED
18
NOTE:
If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN (engine not running) position and the
transmission is in PARK, the system will automatically time out after 30 minutes of
inactivity and the ignition will switch to the OFF position.
Accessory Positions With Engine Off
NOTE:
The following functions are with the driver’s foot off of the Brake Pedal (transmission in
PARK).
Beginning With The Ignition Switch In The OFF Position:
1. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to cycle the ignition to the ACC position.
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time to cycle the ignition to the
ON/RUN position.
3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to return the ignition to the OFF
position.
NOTE:
If the ignition is left in the ACC or ON/RUN
(engine not running) position and the trans-
mission is in PARK, the system will auto-
matically time out after 30 minutes of inac-
tivity, and the ignition is returned to the OFF
position.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM
The vehicle security alarm monitors the vehicle doors for unauthorized entry and the
ignition for unauthorized operation. While the vehicle security alarm is armed, interior
switches for door locks and trunk release are disabled. If something triggers the alarm, the
vehicle security alarm will provide the following audible and visible signals: the horn will
pulse, the park lamps and/or turn signals will flash, and the vehicle security light in the
instrument cluster will flash.
To Arm
Push the Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition button until the instrument cluster display
indicates that the vehicle ignition is “OFF.” Push the power door lock switch while the door
is open, push the key fob lock button, or with one of the key fobs located outside the
vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver's and passenger front door handles, push the
passive entry lock button located on the door handle.
Ignition Positions
GETTING STARTED
19
NOTE:
After pushing the passive entry lock button, you must wait two seconds before you can
lock or unlock the vehicle via the door handle.
To Disarm
Push the key fob unlock button or with one of the key fobs located outside the vehicle and
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver's and passenger front door handles, grab the Keyless
Enter-N-Go door handle and enter the vehicle, then push the Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Ignition button (requires at least one valid key fob in the vehicle).
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems:
Occupant Restraint Systems Features
• Seat Belt Systems
• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
• Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask your authorized
dealer.
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information in this section. It tells you how to use your
restraint system properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air
bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride buckled up in a vehicle with a rear
seat.
2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing child restraint) must ride in the
front passenger seat, move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child
restraint (refer to “Child Restraints”).
3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly (refer to "Child
Restraints") should be secured in a vehicle with a rear seat in child restraints or
belt-positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use child restraints or
belt-positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in a vehicle with a rear
seat.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that
you are using it properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder belts properly.
GETTING STARTED
20
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow
the front air bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle has side air bags, and
deployment occurs, the side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space between
occupants and the door and occupants could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled
person, contact the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided under "If You Need
Consumer Assistance” in your Owner’s Manual on the DVD.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat.
Seat Belt Systems
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even on short trips. Someone on the
road may be a poor driver and could cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they can reduce the seriousness of
injuries in a collision. Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the
vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by
striking the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert)
Driver and Passenger BeltAlert (If Equipped)
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver and outboard front seat passenger
(if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The
Belt Alert feature is active whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN
position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in the START or ON/RUN
position, a chime will signal for a few seconds. If the driver or outboard front seat
passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled when
the ignition switch is first in the START or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder Light
will turn on and remain on until both outboard front seat belts are buckled. The outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front passenger seat is
unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
GETTING STARTED
21
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the vehicle is moving above a specified
vehicle speed range and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is unbuckled (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied). The
BeltAlert warning sequence starts by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding
an intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence has completed, the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will remain on until the seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning
sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the driver and occupied outboard front
seat passenger seat belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all occupants to buckle
their seat belts.
Change Of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger
seat BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert
warning sequence will begin until the seat belts are buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front
passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or other items
are placed on the outboard front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if
equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not
recommend deactivating BeltAlert.
NOTE:
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the driver and outboard front seat
passenger seat belts are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very sudden stops or collisions. This
feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with you under normal
conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking
the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
GETTING STARTED
22
WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, the air bags
won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even though you have air bags.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not
properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers,
or you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your vehicle
are buckled up properly.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly.
Occupants, including the driver, should always wear their seat belts whether or not an
air bag is also provided at their seating position to minimize the risk of severe injury
or death in the event of a crash.
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your injuries in a collision much worse.
You might suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the seat belt. Follow
these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt. People belted together can
crash into one another in a collision, hurting one another badly. Never use a
lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person, no matter what their size.
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of injury in a collision. The seat belt
forces won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your abdomen. Always
wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In a collision, it could even cut into
you. Be sure the seat belt is flat against your body, without twists. If you can’t
straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer immediately
and have it fixed.
• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly. The lap
portion could ride too high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always
buckle your seat belt into the buckle nearest you.
• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you properly. In a sudden stop, you could
move too far forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly.
• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous. Your body could strike the inside
surfaces of the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt
worn under the arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the
force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision.
You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt.
The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together.
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no
protection. Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose
parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify
the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision.
GETTING STARTED
23
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front seat, and next to your arm in the
rear seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and pull out the
seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt
to go around your lap.
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit,
insert the latch plate into the buckle
until you hear a “click.”
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug
and lies low across your hips, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap
belt portion, pull up on the shoulder
belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too
tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the
lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the
risk of sliding under the seat belt in a
collision.
5. Position the shoulder belt across the
shoulder and chest with minimal, if any
slack so that it is comfortable and not
resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle. The seat belt will automatically
retract to its stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow the seat belt to retract fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate, grasp and twist the seat
belt webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch
plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing. The folded webbing must enter
the slot at the top of the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing and the seat belt
is no longer twisted.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and front passenger seats, the top of the shoulder belt can be adjusted
upward or downward to position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or squeeze the
anchorage button to release the anchorage, and move it up or down to the position that
serves you best.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
1 — Seat Belt Latch Plate
2 — Seat Belt Buckle
GETTING STARTED
24
As a guide, if you are shorter than average,
you will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage
in a lower position, and if you are taller than
average, you will prefer the shoulder belt
anchorage in a higher position. After you
release the anchorage button, try to move it
up or down to make sure that it is locked in
position.
NOTE:
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchor-
age is equipped with an Easy Up feature.
This feature allows the shoulder belt an-
chorage to be adjusted in the upward position without pushing or squeezing the release
button. To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull downward on the shoulder
belt anchorage until it is locked into position.
WARNING!
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your injuries in a collision much worse.
You might suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the seat belt. Follow
these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
• Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest with minimal, if any slack so
that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any
slack in the shoulder belt.
• Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt in a
crash.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when the webbing is fully extended
and the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest position,
your authorized dealer can provide you with a Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender
should be used only if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the Seat Belt
Extender is not required for a different occupant, it must be removed.
WARNING!
• ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically required in order to properly fit the
original seat belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender if, when worn, the
distance between the front edge of the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of
the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
• Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can increase the risk of serious injury
or death in a collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the lap belt is not long
enough and only use in the recommended seating positions. Remove and store the
Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
Adjustable Anchorage
GETTING STARTED
25
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants
including pregnant women: the risk of in-
jury in the event of an accident is reduced
for the mother and the unborn child if they
are wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the
abdomen and across the strong bones of
the hips. Place the shoulder belt across the
chest and away from the neck. Never place
the shoulder belt behind the back or under
the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front seat belt system is equipped with
pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event
of a collision. These devices may improve the performance of the seat belt by removing
slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants,
including those in child restraints.
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant. The
seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air
bags, the pretensioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air
bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
This vehicle has a seat belt system with an Energy Management feature in the front
seating positions that may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a collision.
The seat belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a
controlled manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system. For
additional information, refer to “Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt”
under the “Child Restraints” section of this manual. The table below defines the type of
feature for each seating position.
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts
GETTING STARTED
26
If the passenger seating position is
equipped with an ALR and is being used for
normal usage, only pull the seat belt web-
bing out far enough to comfortably wrap
around the occupant’s mid-section so as to
not activate the ALR. If the ALR is acti-
vated, you will hear a clicking sound as the
seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to
retract completely in this case and then
carefully pull out only the amount of web-
bing necessary to comfortably wrap around
the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a "click."
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The seat belt
will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode
anytime a child restraint is installed in a seating position that has a seat belt with this
feature. Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound.
This indicates the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to
disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
GETTING STARTED
27
WARNING!
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working properly when
checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain occupants who are wearing the
seat belt or children who are using booster seats. The locked mode is only used to
install rear-facing or forward-facing child restraints that have a harness for restraining
the child.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask your authorized
dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you in a collision. The Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with
the electrical Air Bag System Components. Your vehicle may be equipped with the
following Air Bag System Components:
Air Bag System Components
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag system components:
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Track Position Sensors
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Air Bag Warning Light
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the air bag system
whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch is
in the OFF position or in the ACC position, the air bag system is not on and the air bags will
not inflate.
GETTING STARTED
28
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the air bag system even
if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument panel for approximately
four to eight seconds for a self-check when the ignition switch is first in the ON/RUN
position. After the self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects
a malfunction in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either
momentarily or continuously. A single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on
again after initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag
Warning Light if a malfunction is detected that could affect the air bag system. The
diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction. While the air bag system is designed
to be maintenance free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service
the air bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the four to eight seconds when the
ignition switch is first in the ON/RUN position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving.
NOTE:
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine related gauges are not working, the
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition the air bags
may not be ready to inflate for your protection. Have an authorized dealer service the air
bag system immediately.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have
the air bag system to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on as a bulb
check when the ignition is first turned on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it
comes on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immedi-
ately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is detected, which could affect the Supplemental
Restraint System (“SRS”), the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will illuminate on the
instrument panel. The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay on until the fault is
cleared. In addition, a single chime will sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light has come on and a fault has been detected. If the Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving have an authorized
dealer service the vehicle immediately.
For additional information regarding the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light, refer to
“Warning/Indicator Lights and Messages” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” in
your Owner’s Manual on the DVD.
GETTING STARTED
29
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts for both the driver and front
passenger. The front air bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The
driver front air bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The passenger front air
bag is mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The words “SRS
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on the air bag covers.
WARNING!
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during front air bag
deployment could cause serious injury, including death. Air bags need room to
inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat.
Driver and Passenger Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver and front passenger air bags.
This system provides output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determined
by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which may receive information from the front
impact sensors (if equipped) or other system components.
Front Air Bag Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster/
Supplemental Passenger Knee Air Bag
3 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
GETTING STARTED
30
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires air bag
deployment. A low energy output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output
is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front passenger seat belt buckle switch
that detects whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat belt
buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front passenger seat track position
sensors that may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon seat
position.
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air bag on the instrument panel or
steering wheel because any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a
collision severe enough to cause the air bag to inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers or attempt to open them
manually. You may damage the air bags and you could be injured because the air
bags may no longer be functional. The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags are inflating.
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, air bags
won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even though you have air bags.
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat
belts. Front air bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover
collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all frontal collisions, including some that
may produce substantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions, truck
underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of impact, front air bags may
deploy in crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial
deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time, vehicle speed and
damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have
deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions, and also are needed to help
keep you in position, away from an inflating air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the front air bags, it signals the inflator units.
A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air bags.
GETTING STARTED
31
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel
separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The front air bags
fully inflate in less time than it takes to blink your eyes. The front air bags then quickly
deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and front passenger, and
position the front occupants for improved interaction with the front air bags.
WARNING!
• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact bolsters in any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact bolsters such as alarm lights,
stereos, citizen band radios, etc.
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag mounted in the
instrument panel below the steering column. The Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
provides enhanced protection during a frontal impact by working together with the seat
belts, pretensioners, and front air bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Your vehicle is equipped with two types of side air bags:
1. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs): Located in the outboard side of the
front seats. The SABs are marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” label sewn into the
outboard side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of
occupant injury during certain side im-
pacts and/or vehicle rollover events, in
addition to the injury reduction poten-
tial provided by the seat belts and body
structure.
When the SAB deploys, it opens the
seam on the outboard side of the seat-
back’s trim cover. The inflating SAB
deploys through the seat seam into the
space between the occupant and the
door. The SAB moves at a very high
speed and with such a high force that it
could injure occupants if they are not
seated properly, or if items are posi-
tioned in the area where the SAB in-
flates. Children are at an even greater
risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air
Bag Label
GETTING STARTED
32
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the Side Air Bags;
the performance could be adversely affected and/or objects could be pushed into you,
causing serious injury.
2. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs): Located above the side
windows. The trim covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”
SABICs may help reduce the risk of
head or other injuries to front and rear
seat outboard occupants in certain side
impacts and/or vehicle rollover events,
in addition to the injury reduction po-
tential provided by the seat belts and
body structure.
The SABICs deploy downward, covering
the side windows. An inflating SABIC
pushes the outside edge of the trim out
of the way and covers the window. The
SABICs inflate with enough force to
injure occupants if they are not belted
and seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the
SABICs inflate. Children are at an even
greater risk of injury from a deploying
air bag.
WARNING!
•Do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the deployment of the
SABICs. The trim covering above the side windows where the SABIC and its
deployment path are located should remain free from any obstructions.
•In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do not install any accessory items in your
vehicle which could alter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to your vehicle.
Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for
installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason.
The SABICs and SABs (Side Air Bags) are designed to activate in certain side impacts and
certain rollover events. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines whether the
deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular side impact or rollover event is appropriate,
based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator
of whether or not Side Air Bags should have deployed.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in
less time than it takes to blink your eyes.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) Label Location
GETTING STARTED
33
WARNING!
• Occupants, including children, who are up against or very close to Side Air Bags can
be seriously injured or killed. Occupants, including children, should never lean on or
sleep against the door, side windows, or area where the side air bags inflate, even if
they are in an infant or child restraint.
• Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) are necessary for your protection
in all collisions. They also help keep you in position, away from an inflating Side Air
Bag. To get the best protection from the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their
seat belts properly and sit upright with their backs against the seats. Children must
be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat that is appropriate for the
size of the child.
• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean against the door or window. Sit
upright in the center of the seat.
• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deployment could cause you to be
severely injured or killed.
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision.
The Side Air Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions,
Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even though you have
Side Air Bags.
GETTING STARTED
34
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but they will open during air bag
deployment.
Side Impacts
In side impacts, the side impact sensors aid the ORC in determining the appropriate
response to impact events. The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on the
impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require Side Air Bag occupant protection.
In side impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left side impact deploys the
left Side Air Bags only and a right side impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions, including some collisions at certain
angles, or some side collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger compartment.
The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled or offset frontal collisions where the front air
bags deploy.
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain rollover events. The ORC determines
whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover event is appropriate,
based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator
of whether or not Side Air Bags should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover events. The rollover sensing system
determines if a rollover event may be in progress and whether deployment is appropriate.
In the event the vehicle experiences a rollover or near rollover event, and deployment of
the Side Air Bags is appropriate, the rollover sensing system will also deploy the seat belt
pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete ejection of vehicle occupants
through side windows in certain rollover or side impact events.
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the internal circuits and interconnect-
ing wiring associated with electrical Air Bag System Components listed below:
Air Bag System Components
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag system components:
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
GETTING STARTED
35
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Track Position Sensors
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment.
NOTE:
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all collisions. This does not mean something
is wrong with the air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any or all of the following may occur:
• The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to the
occupants as the air bags deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction rope
burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not
caused by contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a few days, or if you have any
blistering, see your doctor immediately.
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like particles. The particles are a
normal by-product of the process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air bag
inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have
skin or eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat irritation, move
to fresh air. If the irritation continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on your
clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed. If you are involved in another
collision, the air bags will not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision.
Have the air bags, seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor assemblies
replaced by an authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint
Controller System serviced as well.
NOTE:
• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but they will open during air bag
deployment.
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication network remains intact, and the power
remains intact, depending on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine whether to
have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the following functions:
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
GETTING STARTED
36
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the hazard light button is
pressed. The hazard lights can be deactivated by pressing the hazard light button.
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as the battery has power.
• Unlock the power door locks.
Enhanced Accident Response System Reset Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System functions after an event, the
ignition switch must be changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF.
Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on the ground
near the engine compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting the
engine.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system could cause it to fail when you need
it. You could be injured if the air bag system is not there to protect you. Do not modify
the components or wiring, including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the
steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket side steps or
running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell
anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag system. The air bag may inflate
accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are made. Take your
vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air bag system service. If your seat, including
your trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way (including removal or
loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized
dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary
to modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized
dealer.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR
is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment
or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety
systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
GETTING STARTED
37
• These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data
are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g.,
name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data
routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle
or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law
enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have
access to the vehicle or the EDR.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all times, including babies and
children. Every state in the United States, and every Canadian province, requires that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be prosecuted
for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available.
According to crash statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats
rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The
force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could
not hold the child, no matter how strong you are. The child and others could be badly
injured. Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s
size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child
almost large enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child seat Owner’s Manual
to make sure you have the correct seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the
instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s Manual and on all the labels
attached to the child restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets
all applicable Safety Standards. You should also make sure that you can install it in the
vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
• For additional information, refer to www.safercar.gov/parents/index.htm or call 1–888–
327–4236.
• Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s website for additional informa-
tion: www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm
GETTING STARTED
38
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or
Age
Recommended Type Of Child
Restraint
Infants and Toddlers
Children who are two years
old or younger and who have
not reached the height or
weight limits of their child
restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a
Convertible Child Restraint,
facing rearward in the rear
seat of the vehicle
Small Children
Children who are at least two
years old or who have out-
grown the height or weight
limit of their rear-facing
child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Re-
straint with a five-point Har-
ness, facing forward in the
rear seat of the vehicle
Larger Children
Children who have out-grown
their forward-facing child
restraint, but are too small to
properly fit the vehicle’s seat
belt
Belt Positioning Booster
Seat and the vehicle seat
belt, seated in the rear seat
of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child
Restraints
Children 12 years old or
younger, who have out-grown
the height or weight limit of
their booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in
the rear seat of the vehicle
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two
years old or until they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child
restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used rear-facing: infant carriers and
convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle. It is recommended for children
from birth until they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible child
seats can be used either rear-facing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child
seats often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers do,
so they can be used rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant carrier but are
still less than at least two years old. Children should remain rear-facing until they reach
the highest weight or height allowed by their convertible child seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat.
GETTING STARTED
39
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their rear-facing convertible child
seat can ride forward-facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible
child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years old
or who have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of their rear-facing convertible
child seat. Children should remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long
as possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the forward-facing limit for the child seat
should use a belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If the
child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is
against the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and
belt-positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint. It could come
loose in a collision. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child
restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child re-
straint.
• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat forward
or rearward because it can loosen the child restraint attachments. Remove the child
restraint before adjusting the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has been
adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or
LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle.
In a sudden stop or accident, it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are
long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback,
should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step test to decide whether the
child can use the vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front of the vehicle seat – while they are
still sitting all the way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder between their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching the child’s thighs and not their
stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
GETTING STARTED
40
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the child still needs to use a booster
seat in this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched. A child’s squirming or
slouching can move the belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a booster seat to position the seat
belt on the child correctly.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back. In a
crash, the shoulder belt will not protect a child properly, which may result in serious
injury or death. A child must always wear both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat
belt correctly.
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint
Type
Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below
LATCH –
Lower An-
chors Only
Seat Belt
Only
LATCH –
Lower An-
chors + Top
Tether An-
chor
Seat Belt +
Top Tether
Anchor
Rear-Facing
Child Re-
straint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg) X X
Rear-Facing
Child Re-
straint
More than
65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
Forward-
Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg) XX
Forward-
Facing Child
Restraint
More than
65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren (LATCH) Restraint System
GETTING STARTED
41
Your vehicle is equipped with the child
restraint anchorage system called LATCH,
which stands for Lower Anchors and Tethers
for CHildren. The LATCH system has three
vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-
equipped child seats. There are two lower
anchorages located at the back of the seat
cushion where it meets the seatback and
one top tether anchorage located behind
the seating position. These anchorages are
used to install LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some
seating positions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these
seating positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether anchorage to install the
child restraint. Please see the following table for more information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit
(child’s weight + weight of
the child restraint) for using
the LATCH anchorage sys-
tem to attach the child re-
straint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage
system until the combined
weight of the child and the
child restraint is 65 lbs
(29.5 kg). Use the seat belt
and tether anchor instead of
the LATCH system once the
combined weight is more
than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
LATCH Label
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Re-
straints In This Vehicle
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 Anchor-
ages Per Seating Position
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
GETTING STARTED
42
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
Can the LATCH anchorages
and the seat belt be used
together to attach a rear-
facing or forward-facing
child restraint?
No
Do not use the seat belt
when you use the LATCH
anchorage system to attach
a rear-facing or forward-
facing child restraint.
Can two child restraints be
attached using a common
lower LATCH anchorage?
No
Never “share” a LATCH an-
chorage with two or more
child restraints. If the center
position does not have dedi-
cated LATCH lower anchor-
ages, use the seat belt to
install a child seat in the
center position next to a
child seat using the LATCH
anchorages in an outboard
position.
Can the rear-facing child
restraint touch the back of
the front passenger seat?
Yes
The child seat may touch
the back of the front passen-
ger seat if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows
contact. See your child re-
straint owner’s manual for
more information.
Can the head restraints be
removed? Yes Center position only may be
removed.
Locating LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are found at the rear of the seat cushion
where it meets the seatback, below the anchorage symbols on the seatback. They are just
visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint. You will easily feel
them if you run your finger along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
Locating Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages be-
hind each rear seating position located in
the panel between the rear seatback and
the rear window. They are found under a
plastic cover with the tether anchorage
symbol on it.
LATCH Anchorages
GETTING STARTED
43
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems
will be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible
strap on each side. Each will have a hook or
connector to attach to the lower anchorage
and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints
and some rear-facing child restraints will
also be equipped with a tether strap. The
tether strap will have a hook at the end to
attach to the top tether anchorage and a
way to tighten the strap after it is attached
to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
If a child restraint installed in the center
position blocks the seat belt webbing or
buckle for the outboard position, do not use that outboard position. If a child seat in the
center position blocks the outboard LATCH anchors or seat belt, do not install a child seat
in that outboard position.
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more than one child restraint. Please
refer to “Installing The LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint System” for typical instal-
lation instructions.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint manufacturer when installing your child
restraint. Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat
belt, stow the seat belt, following the instructions below. See the section “Installing Child
Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt” to check what type of seat belt each seating
position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap of the child seat so that
you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for that seating position. For some
second row seats, you may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head restraint to
get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you
may wish to move it to its rear-most position to make room for the child seat. You may
also move the front seat forward to allow more room for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child restraint to the lower anchorages in
the selected seating position.
Tether Strap Anchorages
GETTING STARTED
44
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the top tether anchorage. See the
section “Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to
attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the
seat. Remove slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child
seat at the belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR (ALR) Seat Belt
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts
that are not being used by other occupants or being used to secure child restraints. An
unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and accidentally lock the seat belt
retractor. Before installing a child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat belt
behind the child restraint and out of the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes
with the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it behind the child restraint, route
the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seat
belt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and that they should
not play with them.
WARNING!
• Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure
of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by
correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult
seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap
belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a child restraint can lead to failure
of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant
or child restraint.
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt
tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR
retractor can be “switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the
GETTING STARTED
45
retractor and then letting the webbing retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the
ALR will make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into the retractor. Refer
to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description under “Occupant Restraints” for additional
information on ALR.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit
(child’s weight + weight of
the child restraint) for using
the Tether Anchor with the
seat belt to attach a forward
facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the Child
Restraint
Always use the tether anchor
when using the seat belt to
install a forward facing child
restraint, up to the recom-
mended weight limit of the
child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child
restraint touch the back of
the front passenger seat?
Yes
Contact between the front
passenger seat and the child
restraint is allowed, if the
child restraint manufacturer
also allows contact.
Can the head restraints be
removed? Yes Center Only may be re-
moved.
Can the buckle stalk be
twisted to tighten the seat
belt against the belt path of
the child restraint?
No
Do not twist the buckle stalk
in a seating position with an
ALR retractor.
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
GETTING STARTED
46
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap
belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a child restraint can lead to failure
of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant
or child restraint.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating position.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to pass it through the belt path
of the child restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of the belt until you have pulled
all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract back
into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This means
the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is locked, you should not be able to pull
out any webbing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child
restraint while you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle
seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the seating position has a top tether
anchorage, connect the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See
the section “Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions
to attach a tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child
seat at the belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight
if necessary.
GETTING STARTED
47
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether Anchorage
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat to any location in front of the car
seat, including the seat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the tether strap of a
rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage that is approved for that seating position,
located behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the section “Lower Anchors and Tethers
for CHildren (LATCH) Restraint System” for the location of approved tether anchorages
in your vehicle.
1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to install the child restraint to find the
tether anchorage. You may need to move the seat forward to provide better access to
the tether anchorage. If there is no top tether anchorage for that seating position, move
the child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is available.
2. Rotate or lift the cover to access the anchor directly behind the seat where you are
placing the child restraint.
3. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for the strap between the anchor
and the child seat. If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints,
raise the head restraint, and where possible, route the tether strap under the head
restraint and between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head restraint and pass
the tether strap around the outboard side of the head restraint.
4. Attach the tether strap hook of the child
restraint to the top tether anchorage as
shown in the diagram.
5. Remove slack in the tether strap accord-
ing to the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions.
Tether Strap Attachment
1 — Cover
3 — Attaching Strap
A — Tether Strap Hook
B — Tether Anchor
GETTING STARTED
48
WARNING!
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and
possible injury to the child. Use only the anchorage position directly behind the child
seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat, make sure the tether strap does not
slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap.
Center Tether Attachment
1. Lower the adjustable center head restraint to the full down position.
2. Route the tether strap over the seatback and head restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the center tether anchorage
located in the panel between the rear seatback and the rear window.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet. An unrestrained pet will be
thrown about and possibly injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a
collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured
by seat belts.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by restricting head movement in
the event of a rear impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the head
restraint is located above the top of your ear.
WARNING!
• All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s
seat until the head restraints are placed in their proper positions in order to minimize
the risk of neck injury in the event of a crash.
• Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious
injury or death in the event of a collision.
GETTING STARTED
49
NOTE:
Do not reverse the head restraints (making the rear of the head restraint face forward) in
an attempt to gain additional clearance to the back of your head.
Reactive Head Restraints — Front Seats
The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with Reactive Head Restraints (RHR).
In the event of a rear impact the RHRs will automatically extend forward minimizing the
gap between the back of the occupants head and the RHR.
The RHRs will automatically return to their normal position following a rear impact. If the
RHRs do not return to their normal position see your authorized dealer immediately.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head restraint. To lower the head restraint,
push the adjustment button located at the base of the head restraint and push downward
on the head restraint.
NOTE:
To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it can go then push the release button and
the adjustment button at the base of each post while pulling the head restraint up. To
reinstall the head restraint, put the head restraint posts into the holes and push
downward. Then adjust the head restraint to the appropriate height.
WARNING!
• A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could cause serious
injury or death to occupants of the vehicle. Always securely stow removed head
restraints in a location outside the occupant compartment.
• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the vehicle to properly protect the
occupants. Follow the re-installation instructions above prior to operating the vehicle
or occupying a seat.
• Do not place items over the top of the Reactive Head Restraint, such as coats, seat
covers or portable DVD players. These items may interfere with the operation of the
Reactive Head Restraint in the event of a collision and could result in serious injury
or death.
Rear Head Restraints
The center head restraint has two adjustable positions, up or down. When the center seat
is being occupied the head restraint should be in the raised position. When there are no
occupants in the center seat the head restraint can be lowered for maximum visibility for
the driver.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head restraint. To lower the head restraint,
push the adjustment button located at the base of the head restraint and push downward
on the head restraint.
GETTING STARTED
50
NOTE:
• The head restraint should only be removed by qualified technicians, for service
purposes only. If the center rear head restraints requires removal, see your authorized
dealer.
• The outboard head restraints are not adjustable.
SEATING
FRONT SEATS
Power Seats
On models equipped with power seats, the switch is located on the outboard side of the
seat near the floor. Use this switch to move the driver's seat up, down, forward, rearward
or to recline the seatback.
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and
rearward. Push the seat switch forward or
rearward. The seat will move in the direc-
tion of the switch. Release the switch when
the desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up
or down. Pull upward or push downward on
the seat switch. The seat will move in the
direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position is reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be ad-
justed in four directions. Pull upward or
push downward on the front or rear of the
seat switch, the front or rear of the seat
cushion will move in the direction of the
switch. Release the switch when the desired position has been reached.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or rearward. Push the seatback switch
forward or rearward, the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position is reached.
Power Seat Switches
1 — Seatback Control
2 — Seat Control
GETTING STARTED
51
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could
result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is
parked. Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting
against your chest. In a collision, you could slide under the seat belt, which could
result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause
damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped
by an obstruction in the seat’s path.
Power Lumbar
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats may also be equipped with power
lumbar. The power lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the power seat. Push
the switch forward or rearward to increase or decrease the lumbar support. Push the
switch upward or downward to raise or lower the lumbar support.
Memory Seat
This feature allows the driver to store up to
two different memory profiles for easy recall
through a memory switch. Each memory
profile contains desired position settings for
the driver seat, side mirrors, and power tilt
and telescopic steering column (if
equipped) and a set of desired radio station
presets. Your remote keyless entry key fob
can also be programmed to recall the same
positions when the unlock button is
pushed.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with two key
fobs, one key fob can be linked to memory
position 1 and the other key fob can be linked to memory position 2.
The memory seat switch is located on the driver’s door trim panel. The switch consists of
three buttons: The (S) button, which is used to activate the memory save function and the
(1) and (2) buttons which are used to recall either of two pre-programmed memory
profiles.
Power Lumbar Switch
GETTING STARTED
52
Programming The Memory Feature
NOTE:
Saving a new memory profile will erase an
existing profile from memory.
To create a new memory profile, perform the
following:
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition to the ON/
RUN position.
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to
desired preferences (i.e., seat, side mir-
ror, power tilt and telescopic steering
column [if equipped], and radio station
presets).
3. Push and release the SET (S) button on
the memory switch.
4. Within five seconds, push and release the MEMORY button 1 or 2. The instrument
cluster display will show which memory position has been set.
NOTE:
• Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in PARK, but the vehicle must be in
PARK to recall a memory profile.
• To set a memory profile to your key fob, refer to “Linking And Unlinking The Remote
Keyless Entry Key Fob To Memory” in this section.
Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry Key Fob To Memory
Your key fobs can be programmed to recall one of two pre-programmed memory profiles
by pushing the unlock button on the key fob.
NOTE:
Before programming your key fobs you must select the “Memory To FOB” or “Personal
Settings Linked To Fob” feature through the Uconnect system screen. Refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
To program your key fobs, perform the following:
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition to the OFF position.
2. Select desired memory profile (1) or (2). The system will recall any stored settings for
this profile. Wait for the system to complete the memory recall before continuing to
Step 3.
Memory Seat Switches
GETTING STARTED
53
NOTE:
If a memory profile has not already been set, refer to "Programming The Memory Feature"
in this section for instructions on how to set a memory profile.
3. Once the profile has been recalled, push and release the SET (S) button on the
memory switch, then push and release button (1) or (2) accordingly. “Memory Profile
Set” (1 or 2) will display in the instrument cluster display.
4. Push and release the lock button on the key fob within 10 seconds.
NOTE:
Your key fobs can be unlinked from your memory settings by pushing the SET (S) button,
and within 10 seconds, followed by pushing the unlock button on the key fob.
Memory Position Recall
NOTE:
The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory positions. If a recall is attempted when the
vehicle is not in PARK, a message will display in the instrument cluster display.
To recall the memory settings for driver 1, push MEMORY button number 1 on the driver's
door or the unlock button on the key fob linked to memory position 1.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, the memory settings will be recalled with a
Passive Entry Unlock into the driver's door using the key fob linked to position 1.
To recall the memory setting for driver 2, push MEMORY button number 2 on the driver's
door or the unlock button on the key fob linked to memory position 2.
GETTING STARTED
54
NOTE:
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, the memory settings will be recalled with a
Passive Entry Unlock into the driver's door using the key fob linked to position 2.
A recall can be cancelled by pushing any of the MEMORY buttons (S, 1, or 2) on the
driver's door during a recall. When a recall is cancelled, the driver's seat, adjustable pedals
(if equipped), and power tilt and telescopic steering column (if equipped) stop moving. A
delay of one second will occur before another recall can be selected.
Easy Entry/Exit Seat
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when
entering and exiting the vehicle.
The distance the driver seat moves depends on where you have the driver seat positioned
when you cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the OFF position.
• When you cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the OFF position, the driver seat will move
about 2.4 inches (60 mm) rearward if the driver seat position is greater than or equal
to 2.7 inches (67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. The seat will return to its previously
set position when you cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the ACC or RUN position.
• The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the driver seat position is less than
0.9 inches (22.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no benefit to
the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit or Easy Entry.
Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy Entry and Easy Exit position.
NOTE:
The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled when the vehicle is delivered from the factory.
The Easy Entry/Exit feature is enabled (or later disabled) through the programmable
features in the Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings/Customer Programmable
Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” in the Owner’s Manual on the DVD
for further information.
Manual Seat Adjustments
Forward Or Rearward Adjustment
The adjusting bar is at the front of the seat, near the floor. Pull the bar upward to move the
seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once the seat is in the position desired. Using
body pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters
have latched.
GETTING STARTED
55
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous. The sudden movement of the
seat could cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and
you could be injured. Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
Recline
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the outboard side of the seat, lean back to
the desired position and release the lever. To return the seatback, lift the lever, lean
forward and release the lever.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting
against your chest. In a collision, you could slide under the seat belt, which could result
in serious injury or death.
REAR SEATS
Folding Rear Seat
The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide an additional storage area. To fold the
rear seatback, pull on the loops located on the upper seatback.
NOTE:
These loops can be tucked away when not in use.
Manual Seat Adjustment
1 — Recliner Lever
2 — Adjustment Bar
GETTING STARTED
56
After releasing the seatback, it can be
folded forward.
NOTE:
You may experience deformation in the seat
cushion from the seat belt buckles if the
seats are left folded for an extended period
of time. This is normal and by simply open-
ing the seats to the open position, over time
the seat cushion will return to its normal
shape.
When the seatback is folded to the upright
position, make sure it is latched by strongly
pulling on the top of the seatback above the
seat strap.
WARNING!
• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position. If the seatback is not
securely locked into position, the seat will not provide the proper stability for child
seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the rear seatbacks in the locked-up or
folded down position) should not be used as a play area by children when the vehicle
is in motion. They could be seriously injured in a collision. Children should be seated
and using the proper restraint system.
HEATED SEATS
On some models, the front and rear seats may be equipped with heaters in both the seat
cushions and seatbacks.
The front driver and passenger heated seats are operated using the Uconnect System.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age, chronic
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other
physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that insulates against heat, such as a
blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that
has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface
temperature of the seat.
Rear Seat Loop
GETTING STARTED
57
Front Heated Seats
The front heated seats control buttons are located within the climate or controls screen of
the touchscreen.
You can choose from HI, LO or OFF heat settings. The indicator arrows in touchscreen
buttons indicate the level of heat in use. Two indicator arrows will illuminate for HI, one
for LO and none for OFF.
• Press the heated seat button once to turn the HI setting ON.
• Press the heated seat button a second time to turn the LO setting ON.
• Press the heated seat button a third time to turn the heating elements OFF.
If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will automatically switch to LO-level after
approximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the display will change
from HI to LO, indicating the change. The LO-level setting will turn OFF automatically
after approximately 45 minutes.
NOTE:
• Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within two to five minutes.
• The engine must be running for the heated seats to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the driver’s heated seat can be pro-
grammed to come on during a remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” in the Owner's Manual on the DVD.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age, chronic
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other
physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that insulates against heat, such as a
blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that
has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface
temperature of the seat.
Rear Heated Seats
On some models, the two outboard seats are equipped with heated seats. The heated seat
switches for these seats are located on the rear of the center console. There are two heated
seat switches that allow the rear passengers to operate the seats independently.
You can choose from HI, LO or OFF heat settings. The indicator lights in each switch
indicate the level of heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HI, one for LO and
none for OFF.
GETTING STARTED
58
• Push the heated seat button once to select HI-level heating.
• Push the heated seat button a second time to select LO-level heating.
• Push the heated seat button a third time to turn the heating elements OFF.
NOTE:
• Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within two to five minutes.
• The engine must be running for the heated seats to operate.
If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will automatically switch to LO-level after
approximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the number of illumi-
nated LEDs changes from two to one, indicating the change. The LO-level setting will turn
OFF automatically after approximately 45 minutes.
FRONT VENTILATED SEATS
If your vehicle is equipped with ventilated seats, the seat cushion and seat back will have
fans that draw the air from the passenger compartment and move air through fine
perforations in the seat cover to help keep the driver and front passenger cooler in higher
ambient temperatures. The fans operate at two speeds, HI and LO.
The front ventilated seats control buttons are located within the Uconnect system. You
can gain access to the control buttons through the climate screen or the controls screen.
• Press the ventilated seat button once to choose HI.
• Press the ventilated seat button a second time to choose LO.
• Press the ventilated seat button a third time to turn the ventilated seat OFF.
GETTING STARTED
59
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the ventilated seats to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the driver’s ventilated seat can be
programmed to come on during a remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” in the Owner's Manual on the DVD.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps warm your hands in cold
weather. The heated steering wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on, it will stay on for an average of 80 minutes before
automatically shutting off. This time will vary based on environmental temperatures. The
heated steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn on when the steering wheel is
already warm.
The heated steering wheel control button is located within the Uconnect system. You can
gain access to the control button through the climate screen or the controls screen.
• Press the heated steering wheel button once to turn the heating element ON.
• Press the heated steering wheel button a second time to turn the heating element
OFF.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated steering wheel to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the heated steering wheel can be
programmed to come on during a remote start through the Uconnect system. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” in the Owner’s Manual
on the DVD for further information.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age, chronic
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other
physical conditions must exercise care when using the steering wheel heater. It may
cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods.
• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that insulates against heat, such as a
blanket or steering wheel covers of any type and material. This may cause the
steering wheel heater to overheat.
GETTING STARTED
60
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
Manual Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward. It also allows you
to lengthen or shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is located below the
steering wheel at the end of the steering column.
To unlock the steering column, pull the
lever downward. To tilt the steering column,
move the steering wheel upward or down-
ward as desired. To lengthen or shorten the
steering column, pull the steering wheel
outward or push it inward as desired. To
lock the steering column in position, push
the lever upward until fully engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving. Adjusting the steering column while
driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward. It also allows you
to lengthen or shorten the steering column. The power tilt/telescoping steering column
lever is located below the multifunction lever on the steering column.
Manual Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle
GETTING STARTED
61
To tilt the steering column, move the lever
up or down as desired. To lengthen or
shorten the steering column, pull the lever
toward you or push the lever away from you
as desired.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving. Adjusting the steering column while
driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Control
GETTING STARTED
62
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
3.6L Engine Break-In
For vehicles equipped with the 3.6L, use the following engine break-in recommendations:
A long break-in period is not required for the drivetrain (engine, transmission, clutch, and
rear axle) in your new vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km),
speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws
contributes to a good break-in. However, wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can
be detrimental and should be avoided.
The engine oil, transmission fluid, and axle lubricant installed at the factory is high-quality
and energy-conserving. Oil, fluid, and lubricant changes should be consistent with
anticipated climate and conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For the
recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Main-
taining Your Vehicle” in this guide.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may
result.
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE
63
NOTE:
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles (kilometers) of
operation. This should be considered a normal part of the break-in and not interpreted as
an indication of difficulty. Please check your oil level with the engine oil indicator often
during the break in period. Add oil as required.
5.7L Engine Break-In
For vehicles equipped with the 5.7L, use the following engine break-in recommendations:
A long break-in period is not required for the drivetrain (engine, transmission, clutch, and
rear axle) in your new vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km),
speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws
contributes to a good break-in. However, wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can
be detrimental and should be avoided.
The engine oil, transmission fluid, and axle lubricant installed at the factory is high-quality
and energy-conserving. Oil, fluid, and lubricant changes should be consistent with
anticipated climate and conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For the
recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Main-
taining Your Vehicle” in this guide.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may
result.
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE
64
NOTE:
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles (kilometers) of
operation. This should be considered a normal part of the break-in and not interpreted as
an indication of difficulty. Please check your oil level with the engine oil indicator often
during the break in period. Add oil as required.
6.4L Engine Break-In
For vehicles equipped with the 6.4L use the following engine break-in recommendations:
Despite modern technology and World Class manufacturing methods, the moving parts of
the vehicle must still wear in with each other. This wearing in occurs mainly during the first
500 miles (805 km) and continues through the first oil change interval.
It is recommended for the operator to observe the following driving behaviors during the
new vehicle break-in period:
0 to 100 miles (0 to 160 km):
• Do not allow the engine to operate at idle for an extended period of time.
• Press the accelerator pedal slowly and not more than halfway to avoid rapid accelera-
tion.
• Avoid aggressive braking.
• Drive with the engine speed less than 3,500 RPM.
• Maintain vehicle speed below 55 mph (88 km/h) and observe local speed limits.
100 to 300 miles (160 to 483 km):
• Press the accelerator pedal slowly and not more than halfway to avoid rapid accelera-
tion in lower gears (1st to 3rd gears).
• Avoid aggressive braking.
• Drive with the engine speed less than 5,000 RPM.
• Maintain vehicle speed below 70 mph (112 km/h) and observe local speed limits.
300 to 500 miles (483 to 805 km):
• Exercise the full engine rpm range, shifting manually (paddles or gear shift) at higher
rpms when possible.
• Do not perform sustained operation with the accelerator pedal at wide open throttle.
• Maintain vehicle speed below 85 mph (136 km/h) and observe local speed limits.
For the first 1500 miles (2414 km):
• Do not participate in track events, sport driving schools, or similar activities during the
first 1500 miles (2414 km).
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE
65
NOTE:
Check engine oil with every refueling and add if necessary. Oil and fuel consumption may
be higher through the first oil change interval.
6.2L Engine Break-In
For vehicles equipped with the 6.2L SRT Engine, use the following engine break-in
recommendations. This procedure will be helpful in obtaining optimum performance and
maximum durability for your new SRT Vehicle.
Despite modern technology and World Class manufacturing methods, the moving parts of
the vehicle must still wear in with each other. This wearing in occurs mainly during the first
500 miles (805 km) and continues through the first oil change interval.
It is recommended for the operator to observe the following driving behaviors during the
new vehicle break-in period:
0 to 100 miles (0 to 160 km):
• Do not allow the engine to operate at idle for an extended period of time.
• Press the accelerator pedal slowly and not more than halfway to avoid rapid accelera-
tion.
• Avoid aggressive braking.
• Drive with the engine speed less than 3,500 RPM.
• Maintain vehicle speed below 55 mph (88 km/h) and observe local speed limits.
100 to 300 miles (160 to 483 km):
• Press the accelerator pedal slowly and not more than halfway to avoid rapid accelera-
tion in lower gears (1st to 3rd gears).
• Avoid aggressive braking.
• Drive with the engine speed less than 5,000 RPM.
• Maintain vehicle speed below 70 mph (112 km/h) and observe local speed limits.
300 to 500 miles (483 to 805 km):
• Exercise the full engine rpm range, shifting manually (paddles or gear shift) at higher
rpms when possible.
• Do not perform sustained operation with the accelerator pedal at wide open throttle.
• Maintain vehicle speed below 85 mph (136 km/h) and observe local speed limits.
For the first 1500 miles (2414 km):
• Do not participate in track events, sport driving schools, or similar activities during the
first 1500 miles (2414 km).
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE
66
NOTE:
Check engine oil with every refueling and add if necessary. Oil and fuel consumption may
be higher through the first oil change interval.
TURN SIGNAL/WIPER/WASHER/HIGH BEAM LEVER
Turn Signal/Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once and the turn
signal (right or left) will flash three times.
Then, it will turn off automatically.
Front Wipers
Intermittent, Low And High Operation
Rotate the end of the lever to the first detent
position for one of four intermittent set-
tings, the second detent for low wiper op-
eration and the third detent for high wiper
operation.
Mist
Rotate the end of the lever rearward when a
single wipe is desired.
Multifunction Lever
1 — Push For Washer
2 — Rotate Downward For Mist
3 — Push Lever For High Beams
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE
67
NOTE:
The mist feature does not activate the washer pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be
sprayed on the windshield. The wash function must be activated in order to spray the
windshield with washer fluid.
Washer Operation
Push the end of the lever inward and hold for as long as spray is desired.
Rain Sensing Wipers
This feature senses moisture on the vehicle's windshield and automatically activates the
wipers for the driver when the switch is in the intermittent position. Rotate the end of the
lever to one of four settings to activate this feature and adjust sensitivity.
Rain Sensing can be turned on and off using the Uconnect System, refer to the Owner's
Manual on the DVD for further details.
High Beam Operation
Push the lever forward to activate the high beams. Pull the lever toward you for flash to
pass.
NOTE:
For safe driving, turn off the high beams when oncoming traffic is present to prevent
headlight glare and as a courtesy to other motorists.
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
Automatic Headlights/Parking Lights/Headlights
• Rotate the headlight switch, located on
the instrument panel to the left of the
steering wheel, to the first detent from
the off position for parking light and
to the second detent for headlight .
• With the parking lights or low beam
headlights on, push the headlight switch
for front fog lights. Pushing the switch a
second time will deactivate the front fog
lights. Turning the headlight switch off
will also deactivate the front fog lights.
• Rotate the headlight switch to “AUTO”
for AUTO headlights.
• When set to AUTO, the system automati-
cally turns the headlights on or off based
on ambient light levels.
Headlight Switch
1 — Automatic Headlights
2 — Rotate Headlight Switch
3 — Rotate Dimmer
4 — Rotate Ambient
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE
68
Automatic High Beams
The Automatic High Beams system provides increased forward lighting at night by
automating high beam control through the use of a digital camera mounted above the
inside rearview mirror. This camera detects vehicle specific light and automatically
switches from high beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view. This
feature is programmable through the Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” in the Owner's Manual on the DVD for further
details.
Instrument Panel Dimmer
• Rotate the dimmer control to the extreme bottom position to fully dim the instrument
panel lights and prevent the interior lights from illuminating when a door is opened.
• Rotate the dimmer control up to increase the brightness of the instrument panel and
cupholders when the parking lights or headlights are on.
• Rotate the dimmer control up to the next detent position to fully brighten the odometer
and radio when the parking lights or headlights are on.
• Rotate the dimmer control up to the last detent position to turn on the interior lighting.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, the dimming is programmable through
the Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” in the Owner's Manual on the DVD for further details.
Ambient Light Dimmer
• Rotate the ambient light control up or down to increase or decrease the brightness of
the release handle, map pocket (if equipped), overhead and floor lighting when the
parking lights or headlights are on.
• Rotate to extreme bottom position to turn off.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over accelerator operations at speeds
greater than 25 mph (40 km/h).
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of the steering wheel.
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE
69
NOTE:
In order to ensure proper operation, the
Electronic Speed Control System has been
designed to shut down if multiple speed
control functions are operated at the same
time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed
Control System can be reactivated by push-
ing the Electronic Speed Control on/off but-
ton and resetting the desired vehicle set
speed.
To Activate
Push the on/off button to activate the Elec-
tronic Speed Control. CRUISE CONTROL
READY will appear on the instrument clus-
ter display to indicate the electronic speed
control is on. To turn the system off, push
the on/off button a second time. CRUISE
CONTROL OFF will appear on the instru-
ment cluster display to indicate the elec-
tronic speed control is off. The system
should be turned off when not in use.
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous. You
could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose
control and have an accident. Always leave the system off when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Electronic Speed Control on. When the vehicle has reached the desired speed,
push the SET (+) or SET (-) button and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle
will operate at the selected speed. Once a speed has been set a message CRUISE
CONTROL SET TO MPH (km/h) will appear indicating what speed was set. A cruise
indicator lamp, along with set speed will also appear and stay on in the instrument cluster
display when the speed is set.
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC button or normal brake pressure while
slowing the vehicle will deactivate the Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set
speed from memory.
Pushing the on/off button or turning the ignition to the OFF position erases the set speed
from memory.
Electronic Speed Control Switches
1 — Push Cancel
2 — Push Set+/Accel
3 — Push Resume
4 — Push On/Off
5 — Push Set-/Decel
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE
70
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+) button and release. Resume can be
used at any speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by pushing the SET +
button.
The driver's preferred units can be selected through the instrument panel settings if
equipped. Refer to “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” in the Owner’s Manual on the
DVD for more information. The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen speed
unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET +button once will result in a 1 mph increase in set speed. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to increase until the
button is released, then the new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET +button once will result in a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to increase until the
button is released, then the new set speed will be established.
To Decrease Speed
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can decrease speed by pushing the SET -
button.
The driver's preferred units can be selected through the instrument panel settings if
equipped. Refer to “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” in the Owner’s Manual on the
DVD for more information. The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen speed
unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET -button once will result in a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to decrease until the
button is released, then the new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET -button once will result in a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE
71
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to decrease until the
button is released, then the new set speed will be established.
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the pedal is released, the vehicle will
return to the set speed.
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the vehicle set speed.
NOTE:
The Electronic Speed Control system maintains speed up and down hills. A slight speed
change on moderate hills is normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive
without Electronic Speed Control.
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a
constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose
control and have an accident. Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on
roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC)
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE
72
If your vehicle is equipped with Adaptive
Cruise Control, the controls operate exactly
the same as the electronic speed control
with only a couple of differences. With this
option, you can set a specified distance you
would like to maintain between you and the
vehicle in front of you.
If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead,
ACC will apply limited braking or accelera-
tion automatically to maintain a preset fol-
lowing distance, while matching the speed
of the vehicle ahead.
If the sensor does not detect a vehicle
ahead of you, ACC will maintain a fixed set
speed.
ACC On/Off
• Push and release the Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) on/off button.
ACC READY will appear in the instrument
cluster display to indicate the ACC is on.
• Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button a second time to turn
the system off.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off will appear in the instrument cluster display to indicate
the ACC is off.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by pushing the SET +button.
The driver's preferred units can be selected through the instrument panel settings if
equipped. Refer to “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” in the Owner’s Manual on the
DVD for more information. The speed increment shown is dependant on the speed of U.S.
(mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET +button once will result in a 1 mph increase in set speed. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to increase in 5 mph
increments until the button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Adaptive Cruise Switches
1 — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/
Off
2 — Distance Setting – Decrease
3 — Distance Setting – Increase
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE
73
• Pushing the SET +button once will result in a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to increase in 10 km/h
increments until the button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
To Decrease Speed
While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by pushing the SET -button.
The driver's preferred units can be selected through the instrument panel settings if
equipped. Refer to “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” in the Owner’s Manual on the
DVD for more information. The speed increment shown is dependant on the speed of U.S.
(mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET -button once will result in a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to decrease in 5 mph
decrements until the button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET -button once will result in a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to decrease in 10 km/h
decrements until the button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
NOTE:
• When you override and push the SET +button or SET -buttons, the new Set Speed will
be the current speed of the vehicle.
• When you use the SET -button to decelerate, if the engine’s braking power does not
slow the vehicle sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system will automatically
slow the vehicle.
• The ACC system applies the brake down to a full stop when following a target vehicle.
If an ACC host vehicle follows a target vehicle to a standstill, the host vehicle will
release the vehicle brakes two seconds after coming to a full stop.
• The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up hill and down hill. However, a
slight speed change on moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting may occur
while climbing uphill or descending downhill. This is normal operation and necessary
to maintain set speed. When driving up hill and down hill, the ACC system will cancel
if the braking temperature exceeds normal range (overheated).
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE
74
Distance Setting (ACC Only)
The specified following distance for ACC can be set by varying the distance setting
between four bars (longest), three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar (short).
Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC calculates and sets the distance
to the vehicle ahead. This distance setting displays in the instrument cluster display.
• To increase the distance setting, push the Distance Setting—Increase button and
release. Each time the button is pushed, the distance setting increases by one bar
(longer).
• To decrease the distance setting, push the Distance Setting—Decrease button and
release. Each time the button is pushed, the distance setting decreases by one bar
(shorter).
Changing Modes (ACC Only)
If desired, the Adaptive Cruise Control mode can be turned off and the system can be
operated as a normal (Fixed Speed) Speed Control mode. When in the normal (Fixed
Speed) Speed Control mode the distance setting feature will be disabled and the system
will maintain the speed you set.
• To change between the different cruise control modes, push the ADAPTIVE CRUISE
CONTROL (ACC) on/off button which turns the ACC and the normal (Fixed Speed)
Speed Control off.
• Pushing the normal (Fixed Speed) SPEED CONTROL on/off button will result in turning
on (changing to) the normal (Fixed Speed) Speed Control mode.
Refer to your Owner's Manual on the DVD for further information.
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE
75
WARNING!
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience system. It is not a substitute for active
driving involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility to be attentive of road,
traffic, and weather conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle ahead; and, most
importantly, brake operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road
conditions. Your complete attention is always required while driving to maintain safe
control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision and
death or serious personal injury.
The ACC system:
• Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles, and stationary objects (e.g., a
stopped vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
• Cannot take street, traffic, and weather conditions into account, and may be limited
upon adverse sight distance conditions.
• Does not always fully recognize complex driving conditions, which can result in
wrong or missing distance warnings.
• Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop while following a target vehicle and hold the
vehicle for 2 seconds in the stop position. If the target vehicle does not start moving
within two seconds the ACC system will display a message that the system will
release the brakes and that the brakes must be applied manually. An audible chime
will sound when the brakes are released.
You should switch off the ACC system:
• When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet, heavy traffic, and complex driving
situations (i.e., in highway construction zones).
• When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp; when driving on roads that are
winding, icy, snow-covered, slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill slopes.
• When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
• When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a constant speed.
The Cruise Control system has two control modes:
• Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an appropriate distance between
vehicles.
• Normal (fixed speed) electronic speed control mode for cruising at a constant preset
speed. For additional information, refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
Mode” in your Owner’s Manual on the DVD.
Normal (fixed speed) electronic speed control will not react to preceding vehicles.
Always be aware of the mode selected.
You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control buttons. The two control modes
function differently. Always confirm which mode is selected.
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW)
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system provides the driver with audible warnings
and visual warnings within the instrument cluster display, to warn the driver when it
detects a potential frontal collision. The warnings are intended to provide the driver with
enough time to react, avoid or mitigate the potential collision.
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE
76
NOTE:
FCW monitors the information from the forward looking sensors as well as the Electronic
Brake Controller (EBC), to calculate the probability of a forward collision. When the
system determines that a forward collision is probable, the driver will be provided with
audible and visual warnings.
Turning FCW On Or Off
The forward collision button is located in the Uconnect display in the controls settings.
When FCW is selected "Off", there will be an "FCW OFF" icon that appears in the
instrument cluster display.
NOTE:
• The default status of FCW is “on”, this allows the system to warn you of a possible
collision with the vehicle in front of you.
• Changing the FCW status to “off” prevents the system from warning you of a possible
collision with the vehicle in front of you. If FCW is set to “off”, “FCW OFF” will be
displayed in the instrument cluster display.
Changing FCW Status
The FCW feature has two settings and can be changed within the Uconnect System
Screen:
• Far
• Near
Far
The default status of FCW is the “Far” setting.
The far setting provides warnings for potential collisions more distant in front of the
vehicle, allowing the driver to have the most reaction time to avoid a collision.
More cautious drivers that do not mind frequent warnings may prefer this setting.
NOTE:
This setting gives you the most reaction time.
Near
Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting, allows the system to warn you of a
potential frontal collision when you are much closer.
This setting provides less reaction time than the “Far” setting, which allows for a more
dynamic driving experience.
More dynamic or aggressive drivers that want to avoid frequent warnings may prefer this
setting.
Refer to the Owner's Manual on the DVD for further details.
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE
77
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to avoid a collision on its own, nor can
FCW detect every type of potential collision. The driver has the responsibility to avoid
a collision by controlling the vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow this
warning could lead to serious injury or death.
LANESENSE
The LaneSense system can be enabled and disabled with the LaneSense button, located
on the switch panel below the Uconnect display.
• Push the LaneSense button to turn the system on (LED turns off).
The LaneSense system is operational at speeds above 37 mph (60 km/h) and below
112 mph (180 km/h). The LaneSense system uses a forward looking camera to detect
lane markings and measure vehicle position within the lane boundaries.
When both lane markings are detected and the driver unintentionally drifts out of the lane
(no turn signal applied), the LaneSense system provides a haptic warning in the form of
torque applied to the steering wheel to prompt the driver to remain within the lane
boundaries. If the driver continues to unintentionally drift out of the lane, the LaneSense
system provides a visual warning through the instrument cluster display to prompt the
driver to remain within the lane boundaries.
The driver may manually override the haptic warning by applying torque into the steering
wheel at any time.
When only a single lane marking is detected and the driver unintentionally drifts across
the lane marking (no turn signal applied), the LaneSense system provides a visual warning
through the instrument cluster display to prompt the driver to remain within the lane.
When only a single lane marking is detected, a haptic (torque) warning will not be
provided.
Refer to your Owner's Manual on the DVD for further details.
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE
78
NOTE:
When operating conditions have been met, the LaneSense system will monitor if the
driver’s hands are on the steering wheel and provides an audible warning to the driver
when the driver’s hands are not detected on the steering wheel. The system will cancel if
the driver does not return their hands to the wheel.
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera that allows you to
see an on-screen image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the gear selector
is put into REVERSE. The ParkView camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above the
rear license plate. The image will be displayed in the touchscreen display along with a
caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of the screen. After five
seconds, this note will disappear.
NOTE:
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has programmable modes of operation that may be
selected through the Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” in the Owner’s Manual on the DVD for further information.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Camera Delay feature and it is turned on, the rear
camera image will be displayed for up to 10 seconds when the vehicle is shifted out of
REVERSE unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission
is shifted into "PARK" or the vehicle's ignition is cycled to the OFF position.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned off), the rear
camera mode is exited and the last touchscreen appears again.
When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the image to illustrate the width of the
vehicle and its projected backup path based on the steering wheel position. The active
guide lines will show separate zones that will help indicate the distance to the rear of the
vehicle.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the ParkView Rear Back Up
Camera. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up.
You are responsible for the safety of your surroundings and must continue to pay
attention while backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE
79
CAUTION!
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be used as a parking aid. The
ParkView camera is unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive path.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven slowly when using ParkView to
be able to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the driver
look frequently over his/her shoulder when using ParkView.
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens,
rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST
The ParkSense Park Assist system provides visual and audible indications of the distance
between the rear bumper and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g. during a parking
maneuver.
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the ParkSense switch, located on the switch
panel below the Uconnect display.
NOTE:
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or disabled) from the last ignition
cycle when the ignition is changed to the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in REVERSE. If ParkSense is
enabled at this gear selector position, the system will remain active until the vehicle speed
is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or above. The system will become active
again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind
the vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view.
NOTE:
• The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to
79 inches (200 cm) from the rear bumper while the vehicle is in REVERSE, a warning
will display in the instrument cluster display only when “Sound and Display” is
selected from the Uconnect System.
• As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the instrument cluster display will show
fewer arcs and the sound tone will change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
Refer to your Owner's Manual on the DVD for further details.
BLIND SPOT MONITORING
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radar sensors, located inside the rear
bumper fascia, to detect Highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks, motorcycles
etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the rear/front/side of the vehicle.
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE
80
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane width on both sides of the vehicle
12 ft (3.8 m). The zone length starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends
approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear bumper of the vehicle. The BSM system
monitors the detection zones on both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the driver of vehicles in these
areas.
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warn-
ing light will momentarily illuminate in both
outside rear view mirrors to let the driver
know that the system is operational. The
BSM system sensors operate when the ve-
hicle is in any forward gear or REVERSE
and enters standby mode when the vehicle
is in PARK.
The BSM warning light, located in the out-
side mirrors, will illuminate if a vehicle
moves into a blind spot zone.
The BSM system can also be configured to
sound an audible (chime) alert and mute
the radio to notify you of objects that have
entered the detection zones.
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is in-
tended to aid the driver when backing out of
parking spaces where the vision of oncom-
ing vehicles may be blocked. Proceed
slowly and cautiously out of the parking
space until the rear end of the vehicle is
exposed. The RCP system will then have a
clear view of the cross traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is detected, will alert the driver.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the driver is alerted using both the visual
and audible alarms, including reducing the radio volume.
Refer to “Blind Spot Monitoring” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” in the
Owner's Manual on the DVD for more information.
Modes Of Operation
Three selectable modes of operation are available in the Uconnect System. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings/Customer Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” in the Owner’s Manual on the DVD for further information.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only (Default Setting)
Rear Detection Zones
Blind Spot Mirror
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE
81
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the
appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object. However, when the system is
operating in Rear Cross Path mode, the system will respond with both visual and audible
alerts when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio
volume is reduced.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode, the BSM system will provide a
visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the turn
signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an alert present on that side of the vehicle,
an audible chime will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and detected object are
present on the same side at the same time, both the visual and audio alerts will be issued.
In addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) volume will be reduced.
NOTE:
• Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM system, the radio volume is
reduced.
• If the hazard flashers are on, the system will request the appropriate visual alert only.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with both visual and audible alerts
when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio
volume is reduced. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored; the RCP state always requests the
chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off, there will be no visual or audible alerts from either the
BSM or RCP systems.
NOTE:
The BSM system will store the current operating mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each
time the vehicle is started, the previously stored mode will be recalled and used.
EIGHT-SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
The transmission gear range (PRNDM) is displayed both on the gear selector and in the
instrument cluster.
To select a gear range, press the lock button on the gear selector and move the selector
rearward or forward. To shift the transmission out of PARK, the engine must be running
and the brake pedal must be pressed. You must also press the brake pedal to shift from
NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds.
Select the DRIVE range for normal driving.
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE
82
The electronically-controlled transmission
adapts its shift schedule based on driver
inputs, along with environmental and road
conditions. The transmission electronics
are self-calibrating; therefore, the first few
shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat
abrupt. This is a normal condition, and
precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or RE-
VERSE when the accelerator pedal is re-
leased and the vehicle is stopped. Be sure
to keep your foot on the brake pedal when
shifting between these gears.
The transmission gear selector has PARK,
REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and
MANUAL (Autostick) shift positions.
Manual shifts can be made using the
Autostick shift control (refer to “AutoStick”
in this section for further information). Toggling the gear selector forward (-) or rearward
(+) while in the MANUAL (AutoStick) position (beside the DRIVE position) will manually
select the transmission gear, and will display the current gear in the instrument cluster as
M1, M2, M3, etc.
Transmission Gear Selector
1 — Lock Button
2 — Gear Selector
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE
83
NOTE:
If the gear selector cannot be moved to the PARK, REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when
pushed forward) it is probably in the MANUAL (AutoStick, +/-) position (beside the DRIVE
position). In MANUAL (AutoStick) mode, the transmission gear is displayed in the
instrument cluster (as M1, M2, M3, etc.). Move the gear selector to the right (into the
DRIVE [D] position) for access to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.
Refer to Automatic Transmission in the Owner’s Manual on your DVD for further
information.
AUTOSTICK/STEERING WHEEL MOUNTED PADDLE SHIFTERS
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission feature that offers manual gear shifting to
provide you with more control of the vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine
braking, and improve overall vehicle performance.
This system can also provide you with more control during passing, city driving, cold
slippery conditions, mountain driving, trailer towing, and many other situations.
Operation
When the gear selector is in the DRIVE (D) position, the transmission will operate
automatically, shifting between the eight available gears. To activate AutoStick, move the
gear selector into the MANUAL (M) position (beside the DRIVE position). The current
transmission gear will be displayed in the instrument cluster, along with a highlighted "M"
(Manual) indication. When the gear selector is in the MANUAL (M) position, tap the gear
selector forward (-) (or tap the (-) shift paddle on the steering wheel, if equipped) to
downshift the transmission to the next lower gear, or tap the lever rearward (+) (or tap the
(+) shift paddle, if equipped) to command an upshift.
NOTE:
• Tapping one of the steering wheel-
mounted shift paddles (+/-), if equipped,
while the gear selector is in DRIVE, will
activate a temporary AutoStick mode.
Tapping (-) to enter AutoStick mode will
downshift the transmission to the next
lower gear, while tapping (+) to enter
AutoStick mode will retain the current
gear. The current gear will be displayed
in the instrument cluster, but the "M" will
not be highlighted. The transmission will
revert back to normal operation (if the
gear selector remains in DRIVE) after a period of time, depending on accelerator pedal
activity.
• In some models, the shift paddles may be disabled (or re-enabled, as desired) using the
Uconnect Personal Settings.
Shifter Paddles
1 — (–) Shift
Paddle
2 — (+) Shift
Paddle
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE
84
In AutoStick mode, the transmission will shift up or down when (+/-) is manually selected
by the driver (using the gear selector, or the shift paddles [if equipped]), unless an engine
lugging or overspeed condition would result. It will remain in the selected gear until
another upshift or downshift is chosen, except as described below.
• In temporary AutoStick mode (gear selector in DRIVE), the transmission will automati-
cally shift up when maximum engine speed is reached. If the accelerator is fully
depressed, the transmission will downshift when possible (based on current vehicle
speed and gear, except 6.4L models). Lack of accelerator pedal activity will cause the
transmission to revert to automatic operation.
• If normal AutoStick mode is engaged (gear selector in MANUAL position), manual gear
selection will be maintained until the gear selector is returned to DRIVE, or as
described below. The transmission will not upshift automatically at redline in this
mode, nor will downshifts be obtained if the accelerator pedal is pressed to the floor.
• The transmission will automatically downshift as the vehicle slows (to prevent engine
lugging) and will display the current gear.
• The transmission will automatically downshift to first gear when coming to a stop. After
a stop, the driver should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the vehicle is
accelerated.
• You can start out, from a stop, in first or second gear. Tapping (+) (at a stop) will allow
starting in second gear. Starting out in second gear can be helpful in snowy or icy
conditions.
• If a requested downshift would cause the engine to over-speed, that shift will not occur.
• The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low of a vehicle speed.
• Holding the (-) paddle depressed (if equipped), or holding the gear selector in the (-)
position, will downshift the transmission to the lowest gear possible at the current
speed.
• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when AutoStick is enabled.
• The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a fault or overheat condition is
detected.
To disengage AutoStick mode, return the gear selector to the DRIVE position, or press and
hold the (+) shift paddle (if equipped, and the gear selector is already in DRIVE) until “D”
is once again indicated in the instrument cluster. You can shift in or out of the AutoStick
mode at any time without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface. The drive wheels
could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or personal injury.
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE
85
SPORT MODE — WITHOUT PERFORMANCE CONTROL
Your vehicle is equipped with a Sport Mode feature. This mode is a configuration set up
for typical enthusiast driving. The engine, transmission, and steering systems are all set to
their SPORT settings. Sport Mode will provide improved throttle response and modified
shifting for an enhanced driving experience, as well the greatest amount of steering feel.
This mode may be activated and deactivated by pushing the Sport button on the
instrument panel switch bank.
For vehicles equipped with Drive Modes or a “SUPER TRACK PACK” button, refer to
“Performance Control — If Equipped” within “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” on your DVD or in the “Drive Mode Supplement” within your
Owners information kit for further information.
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE
86
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROLS
Uconnect 5.0 Manual Climate Controls
1 — MAX A/C Button
2 — A/C Button
3 — Air Recirculation Button
4 — Front Defroster Button
5 — Rear Defroster Button
6 — Mode Control Button
7 — Climate Control Button
8 — OFF Button
9 — Sync Button
10 — Temperature Control Button
11 — Blower Control Button
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE
87
SYNC Temperature Button
• Press the “SYNC” button once to control driver and passenger temperatures simulta-
neously.
• Press the “SYNC” button a second time to control the temperatures individually.
Air Recirculation
• Use Recirculation for maximum A/C operation.
• For window defogging, turn the Recirculation button off.
• Recirculation is allowed in floor mode and defrost/floor (mix mode) for approximately
five minutes.
Heated Mirrors
The mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This feature is activated whenever you turn on
the rear window defroster.
Manual Climate Controls
1 — FRONT Defroster Button
2 — Driver Temperature Up
3 — Blower Control Knob
4 — Passenger Temperature Up
5 — A/C Button
6 — Air Recirculation Button
7 — Passenger Temperature Down
8 — Off Button
9 — Driver Temperature Down
10 — REAR Window Defroster Button
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE
88
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS (ATC)
Uconnect 8.4 Touchscreen Automatic Climate Controls
1 — MAX A/C Button
2 — A/C Button
3 — Air Recirculation Button
4 — AUTO Button
5 — FRONT Defroster Button
6 — REAR Defroster Button
7 — Passenger Temperature Up
8 — Passenger Temperature Down
9 — SYNC Button
10 — Blower Control Buttons
11 — Mode Control Buttons
12 — OFF Button
13 — Driver Temperature Down
14 — Driver Temperature Up
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE
89
Automatic Operation
The climate system will automatically adjust settings to achieve and maintain comfort.
• Press the AUTO button.
• Select the desired temperature by pushing the Temperature Controls for the driver
and/or passenger.
Air Conditioning (A/C)
If the air conditioning button is pressed while in AUTO mode, the system will exit AUTO
mode and stay in A/C. The mode and blower will be set at the closest mode and blower
position that the system was operating in AUTO.
MAX A/C
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling performance.
Automatic Climate Controls
1 — FRONT Defroster Button
2 — Driver Temperature Up
3 — Blower Control Knob
4 — Passenger Temperature Up
5 — A/C Button
6 — Air Recirculation Button
7 — Passenger Temperature Down
8 — Off Button
9 — AUTO Button
10 — Driver Temperature Down
11 — REAR Window Defroster Button
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE
90
• Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the prior settings. The button on the
touchscreen illuminates when MAX A/C is ON.
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be adjusted to desired user settings.
Pressing other settings will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the prior settings and
the MAX A/C indicator will turn off.
SYNC Temperature Button
• Press the “SYNC” button once to control driver and passenger temperatures simulta-
neously.
• Press the “SYNC” button a second time to control the temperatures individually.
Air Recirculation
• Use Recirculation for maximum A/C operation.
• For window defogging, turn the Recirculation button off.
• If the Recirculation button is pushed while in the AUTO mode, the indicator light may
flash three times to indicate the cabin air is being controlled automatically. The
Recirculation button will be greyed out in these conditions.
Heated Mirrors
The mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This feature is activated whenever you turn on
the rear window defroster.
POWER SUNROOF
The power sunroof switch is located on the overhead console.
Opening Sunroof
Express Open
Push the switch rearward and release it
within one-half second. The sunroof will
fully open and stop automatically.
Manual Open
Push and hold the switch rearward to open
the sunroof. Any release of the switch will
stop the movement, and the sunroof will
remain in a partially open position until the
switch is pushed again.
Venting Sunroof
Push and release the button and the sun-
roof will open to the vent position.
Power Sunroof Switch
1 — Opening Sunroof
2 — Venting Sunroof
3 — Closing Sunroof
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE
91
This is called “Express Vent” and will occur regardless of sunroof position. During Express
Vent operation, any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
Closing Sunroof
Express Closing
Push the switch forward and release it within one-half second. The sunroof will fully close
automatically from any position.
Manual Closing
Push and hold the switch forward to close the sunroof. Any release of the switch will stop
the movement, and the sunroof will remain in a partially closed position until the switch
is pushed again.
Pinch Protection Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close
operation. If an obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the sunroof will
automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs. Next, push the switch
forward and release to Express Close.
NOTE:
If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth
close attempt will be a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled.
WARNING!
• Do not let children play with the sunroof. Never leave children unattended in a
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can
become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch.
Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open
sunroof. You could also be severely injured or killed. Always fasten your seat belt
properly and make sure all passengers are properly secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other
body parts, or any object to project through the sunroof opening. Injury may result.
WIND BUFFETING
Wind buffeting can be described as a helicopter-type percussion sound. If buffeting
occurs with the rear windows open, adjust the front and rear windows together.
If buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening, or adjust any
window. This will minimize buffeting.
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE
92
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE
93
YOUR VEHICLE'S SOUND SYSTEM
1. Uconnect Phone Button pg. 148
2. Uconnect Voice Command Button pg. 111
3. Phone Hang Up Button
4. Steering Wheel Audio Controls (Left – Behind Steering Wheel) pg. 156
5. Steering Wheel Audio Controls (Right – Behind Steering Wheel) pg. 156
6. Volume Knob/Mute Button
ELECTRONICS
94
7. Uconnect Radio pg. 96
8. Tune/Scroll Knob/Browse/Enter Button
9. Power Outlet pg. 164
10. USB Port pg. 123
11. AUX Jack pg. 123
12. USB Port pg. 123
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be equipped with both wired and
wireless networks. These networks allow your vehicle to send and receive information.
This information allows systems and features in your vehicle to function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security features to reduce the risk of
unauthorized and unlawful access to vehicle systems and wireless communications.
Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over time and FCA US LLC, working with
ELECTRONICS
95
its suppliers, evaluates and takes appropriate steps as needed. Similar to a computer or
other devices, your vehicle may require software updates to improve the usability and
performance of your systems or to reduce the potential risk of unauthorized and unlawful
access to your vehicle systems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your vehicle systems may still exist, even
if the most recent version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is installed.
WARNING!
• It is not possible to know or to predict all of the possible outcomes if your vehicle’s
systems are breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems, including safety
related systems, could be impaired or a loss of vehicle control could occur that may
result in an accident involving serious injury or death.
• ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or CD) into your vehicle if it came from a
trusted source. Media of unknown origin could possibly contain malicious software,
and if installed in your vehicle, it may increase the possibility for vehicle systems to
be breached.
• As always, if you experience unusual vehicle behavior, take your vehicle to your
nearest authorized dealer immediately.
NOTE:
• FCA or your dealer may contact you directly regarding software updates.
• To help further improve vehicle security and minimize the potential risk of a security
breach, vehicle owners should:
• Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com/software-update to learn about available
Uconnect software updates.
• Only connect and use trusted media devices (e.g. personal mobile phones, USBs,
CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications cannot be assured. Third parties may
unlawfully intercept information and private communications without your consent. For
further information, refer to “Privacy Practices – If Equipped with Uconnect 8.4 radio” in
“Uconnect + SiriusXM Guardian” in your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement and
“Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in your Owner’s Manual.
IDENTIFYING YOUR RADIO
Uconnect 5.0
ELECTRONICS
96
• 5” Touchscreen
• Three buttons on the faceplate on either
side of the display
Uconnect 8.4
• 8.4” Touchscreen
• HD Button will NOT be visible on right
side of screen when viewing AM or FM
• SiriusXM Travel Link feature NOT listed
within Apps
Uconnect 8.4 NAV
• 8.4” Touchscreen
• HD Button will be visible on right side of
screen when viewing AM or FM
• SiriusXM Travel Link feature listed
within Apps
Uconnect 5.0
Uconnect 8.4
Uconnect 8.4 NAV
ELECTRONICS
97
SIRIUSXM GUARDIAN
SiriusXM Guardian — If Equipped (Available on Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV — U.S.
Residents Only)
WARNING!
• ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road. Some SiriusXM Guardian
services, including a SOS Call and Roadside Assistance Call, will NOT work without
an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network connection.
• ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering wheel. You have full responsi-
bility and assume all risks related to the use of the Uconnect and SiriusXM Guardian
features and applications in this vehicle. Only use Uconnect features and SiriusXM
Guardian services when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by the subscriber.
SiriusXM Guardian enhances your ownership and driving experience by connecting your
vehicle to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network. When connected to an
operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network, you can:
• Place a SOS Call to a SiriusXM Guardian operator who can connect you to emergency
responders.
• Remotely lock/unlock your doors and start your vehicle from virtually anywhere, using
the SiriusXM Guardian App from your device. You can also do so by logging into your
owner site, or by calling SiriusXM Guardian Care when your vehicle has an operable LTE
(voice/data) or 4G (data) network connection. Services can only be used where
coverage is available; see coverage map for details.
• Receive text or email notifications if your vehicle's security alarm goes off.
• Receive stolen vehicle assistance, using GPS technology to help authorities locate your
vehicle if it is stolen.
• Get operator assistance using the ASSIST button on your interior rearview mirror.
Before you dive, familiarize yourself with the easy-to-use SiriusXM Guardian services.
1. The ASSIST and SOS Call buttons are located on your rearview mirror. The ASSIST
button is used for contacting Roadside Assistance, Vehicle Care, SiriusXM Guardian
Care, and Uconnect Care. The SOS Call button connects you to a SiriusXM Guardian
Care Agent, who can connect you to emergency services.
ELECTRONICS
98
NOTE:
Vehicles sold in Canada and Mexico DO NOT have SOS Call system capabilities. SOS Call
or other emergency line operators in Canada and Mexico may not answer or respond to
SOS system calls.
2. The Uconnect “Apps ” button is located in the center of the menu bar of the radio
touchscreen. This is where you can manage your Apps.
3. The Uconnect Voice Command and Uconnect Phone buttons are located on the left
side of your steering wheel. These buttons let you use your voice to give commands,
make phone calls, send and receive text messages hands-free, enter navigation
destinations, and control your radio and media devices.
Included Trial Period For New Vehicles
Your new vehicle may come with an included trial period for use of the SiriusXM Guardian
services starting at the date of vehicle purchase (date based on vehicle sales notification
from your dealer). To activate the trial, you must first register with SiriusXM Guardian.
After the trial period, if you wish to continue your SiriusXM Guardian services you can
choose to purchase a subscription.
SiriusXM Guardian Registration (Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV, U.S. 48 Contiguous
States, Alaska And Hawaii)
To unlock the full potential of SiriusXM Guardian in your vehicle, you first need to register
with SiriusXM Guardian.
1. Push the ASSIST button on your rearview mirror.
2. Press the “Activate” button on the
touchscreen.
3. Select “Customer Care” and a helpful
SiriusXM Guardian Care Agent will reg-
ister your vehicle and handle all of the
details.
Signing up is easy! Simply follow the steps
above. Or, press the “Apps ” button on
the touchscreen, then select the Uconnect
registration app to “Register By Web” and
complete the process using your device or
computer.
Why sign up for SiriusXM Guardian? Here
are just a few examples of things you’ll be
able to do:
• Know that help, if you need it, is only a button press away.
• Lock and unlock your vehicle doors from hundreds of miles away.
• Find your vehicle, no matter where you parked, using the convenient Vehicle Finder
function.
ASSIST Button
ELECTRONICS
99
• Use Send & Go to send a navigation route from your mobile phone to your vehicle’s
navigation system.
For further information, please visit DriveUconnect.com.
Download The SiriusXM Guardian App
You’re only a few steps away from using remote commands and playing your favorite music
in your vehicle.
To use the SiriusXM Guardian App:
• Download the SiriusXM Guardian App to
your mobile device.
• Press the “Info” button on the bottom
menu bar of the app for Vehicle Info.
• Press the “Remote” button on the bot-
tom menu bar of the app to Lock/Unlock,
Remote Start, and activate your horn
and lights remotely.
• Press the “Location” button on the bot-
tom menu bar of the app to bring up a
map to locate your vehicle or send a
location to your vehicle’s navigation sys-
tem.
• Press the “Settings” button in the upper
left corner of the app to bring up app settings and access the Assist Call Centers.
NOTE:
For further information please visit DriveUconnect.com.
Vehicle Finder
The Vehicle Finder feature of the SiriusXM Guardian Mobile App allows you to find the
location of your vehicle when you have lost it. You can also sound the alarm and flash the
lights to make finding your vehicle even easier.
To find your vehicle:
1. Press the “Location” tab on the SiriusXM Guardian Mobile App bottom bar.
2. Select the “Vehicle” icon to determine the location of your vehicle.
3. Select the “Find Route” button that appears, once your vehicle is located.
4. Select your preferred Navigation App to route a path to your vehicle.
Send & Go
The Send ‘N Go feature of the SiriusXM Guardian Mobile App allows you to search for a
destination on your mobile device and then send the route to your vehicle’s native
navigation system.
Mobile App
ELECTRONICS
100
To send a navigation route to your vehicle:
1. Press the “Location tab on the SiriusXM Guardian Mobile App bottom bar.
2. Either type in the destination you would like to navigate to, or search through one of the
categories provided.
3. Select the destination you want to route to from the list that appears.
4. Press the “Send To Vehicle” button, and then confirm the destination by pressing
“Yes,” to send the navigation route to the Uconnect Navigation in your vehicle.
5. Finally, confirm the route inside your vehicle by pressing the “Go Now” option on the
pop-up that appears on the touchscreen, when the vehicle is started.
Renewing Subscriptions (Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV, U.S. 48 Contiguous States,
Alaska And Hawaii)
Subscriptions can be purchased online at Mopar Owner Connect. If you need help push
the ASSIST button on the rearview mirror, then select SiriusXM Guardian Care (or dial
1-877-320-5755 ).
NOTE:
You can set up a SiriusXM Guardian Payment Account online, or by calling SiriusXM
Guardian Care. To set it up online, login to moparownerconnect.com, go to Edit Profile,
then SiriusXM Guardian Account, to set up and manage your Payment Account.
Maintaining Your SiriusXM Guardian Account
Selling Your Vehicle
When you sell your vehicle, we recommend that you remove your SiriusXM Guardian
Account information from the vehicle. You can do this on the Mopar Owner Connect
website moparownerconnect.com. Removing your account information cancels your
subscription and makes your vehicle factory-ready for a new owner/subscriber.
For additional information on SiriusXM Guardian, visit DriveUconnect.com or call
1-877-320-5769
Built-In Features
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the Uconnect features, SiriusXM Guardian
services, and applications in this vehicle. Only use Uconnect features and SiriusXM
Guardian services when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
ELECTRONICS
101
WARNING!
• ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road. Some SiriusXM Guardian
services, including SOS Call and ASSIST, will NOT work without an operable LTE
(voice/data) or 4G (data) network connection.
• Ignoring the rearview mirror light could mean you may not have SOS Call service if
needed. If the rearview mirror light is illuminated, have an authorized dealer service
the SOS Call system immediately.
• The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) turns on the Air Bag Warning Light on the
instrument panel if a malfunction is detected in any part of the airbag system. If the
Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, the air bag system may not be working properly
and the SOS Call system may not send a signal to a SOS Call operator if an air bag
is deployed. If the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, have an authorized dealer
service your vehicle immediately.
• If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous
road conditions or location), do not wait for voice contact from a SOS Call operator.
All occupants should exit the vehicle immediately and move to a safe location.
• The SOS Call system is embedded into the vehicle’s electrical system. Do not add
aftermarket electrical equipment to the vehicle’s electrical system. This may prevent
your vehicle from sending a signal to initiate an emergency call. To avoid interference
that can cause the SOS Call system to fail, never add aftermarket equipment (e.g.,
two-way mobile radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s electrical system
or modify the antennas on your vehicle.
• IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING
DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT), the Uconnect features, apps, and SiriusXM
Guardian services, among others, will not operate.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by the subscriber.
1. ASSIST Call (8.4/8.4 NAV) — The rearview mirror contains an ASSIST push button,
and the touchscreen contains a SiriusXM Guardian App, which will automatically
connect the vehicle occupants to one of these predefined destinations for immediate
support:
ELECTRONICS
102
•Roadside Assistance Call —Ifyou
get a flat tire, or need a tow, you’ll be
connected to someone who can help
anytime. Additional fees may apply.
Additional information in this sec-
tion.
•Uconnect Care — In vehicle support
for Uconnect Apps and Features.
•SiriusXM Guardian Care — In vehicle
support for SiriusXM Guardian ser-
vices.
•Vehicle Care — Total support for your
FCA US LLC vehicle.
2. Emergency SOS Call (If Equipped) —
The rearview mirror contains a SOS Call
button that, when pressed, may place a
call from your vehicle to a SiriusXM
Guardian Care operator, who can con-
nect you to emergency service operators, to request help from local police, fire or
ambulance personnel. If this button is accidentally pressed, you will have 7 seconds to
stop the call. To cancel, press the SOS Call button again or press the “Cancel” button
shown on the touchscreen. After 7 seconds has passed, the SOS call will be placed and
only the SOS Call operator can cancel it. The LED light on the rearview mirror will turn
green once a connection to a SOS Call operator has been made. The green LED light
will turn off once the SOS Call is terminated. Have an authorized dealer service the
vehicle if the rearview mirror light is continuously red. On equipped vehicles, this
feature requires a functioning electrical system and an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
(data) network connection to function properly. If a connection is made between a SOS
Call operator and your vehicle, you understand and agree that SOS Call operators will
stay on the line, even after you connect with emergency services. The Emergency
services operator may, like any other emergency call, record conversations and
sounds in and near your vehicle upon connection.
3. Roadside Assistance (If Equipped) — If your vehicle is equipped with this feature and
has an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network connection, you may be able to
connect with Roadside Assistance by pushing the "ASSIST" button on the rearview
mirror. You will be presented with Assist Care options. Make a selection by pressing the
prompts displayed on the radio. If Roadside Assistance is provided to your vehicle, you
agree to be responsible for any additional roadside assistance service costs that you
may incur. In order to provide SiriusXM Guardian Services to you, we may record and
monitor your conversations with Roadside Assistance, Uconnect Care, SiriusXM
Guardian Care, or Vehicle Care, whether such conversations are initiated through the
SiriusXM Guardian services in your vehicle, your device, or via a landline device, and
SOS Call Button And ASSIST
1 — ASSIST Button
2 — SOS Call Button
ELECTRONICS
103
may share information obtained through such recording and monitoring in accordance
with regulatory requirements. You acknowledge, agree and consent to any recording,
monitoring or sharing of information obtained through any such call recordings.
4. Security Alarm Notification — The Security Alarm Notification feature notifies you via
email or text (SMS) message when the vehicle’s factory-installed security alarm system
has been set-off. There are a number of reasons why your alarm may have been
triggered, one of which could be that your vehicle was stolen. If so, please see the
details of the Stolen Vehicle Assistance service below. When you register, Security
Alarm Notification is automatically set to send you an email at the email address you
provide should the alarm go off. You may also opt to have a text message sent to your
device.
5. Stolen Vehicle Assistance — If your vehicle is stolen, contact local law enforcement
immediately to file a stolen vehicle report. Once this report has been filed, SiriusXM
Guardian Care can help locate your vehicle. The SiriusXM Guardian Care agent will ask
for the stolen vehicle report number issued by local law enforcement. As long as your
vehicle has an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network connection, the
SiriusXM Guardian Care Agent may be able to locate the stolen vehicle and work with
law enforcement to help recover it. Your vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/
data) or 4G (data) network connection and must be registered with SiriusXM Guardian
with an active subscription that includes the applicable feature.
NOTE:
Your vehicle must have a working electrical system for any of the in vehicle SiriusXM
Guardian services to operate.
SiriusXM Guardian Remote Features
If you own a compatible iPhone or Android powered device, the SiriusXM Guardian App
allows you to remotely lock or unlock your doors, start your engine or activate your horn and
lights from virtually anywhere. Your vehicle must be equipped with remote start and your
vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data) or 34G (data) network connection).
Services can only be used where coverage is available; see coverage map for details. You
can download the App from Mopar Owner Connect or from the App Store (iPhone) or
Google Play Store (Android). Visit UconnectPhone.com to determine if your device is
compatible. For Uconnect Phone customer support and to determine if your device is
compatible.
U.S. residents - visit UconnectPhone.com or call 1-877-855-8400.
Remote Start (If Equipped) — This feature provides the ability to start the engine on your
vehicle, without the keys and from virtually any distance. You can send a request to your
vehicle in one of two ways:
1. Using the SiriusXM Guardian App from a compatible device.
2. From the Mopar Owner Connect website.
• After 15 minutes if you have not entered your vehicle with the key, the engine will
shut off automatically.
ELECTRONICS
104
• You can also send a command to turn-off an engine that has been remote started.
• This remote function requires your vehicle to be equipped with a factory-installed
Remote Start system. To utilize this feature after the SiriusXM Guardian App is
downloaded, login with your user name and password.
To use this feature after the SiriusXM Guardian App is downloaded, login using your user
name and password. You will need your four digit SiriusXM Guardian Security PIN to
confirm the request. Press the “remote start” icon on your SiriusXM Guardian App to
remotely start the vehicle.
You can set-up notifications for your account to receive an email or text (SMS) message
every time a command is sent. Login to Mopar Owner Connect moparownerconnect.com
and click on Edit Profile to manage SiriusXM Guardian Notifications.
Remote Door Lock/Unlock — This feature provides the ability to lock or unlock the door on
your vehicle, without the keys and from virtually any distance. You can send a request to
your vehicle in one of three ways:
1. Using the SiriusXM Guardian App from a compatible device.
2. From the Mopar Owner Connect website.
3. By contacting the SiriusXM Guardian Care on the phone.
To use this feature after the SiriusXM Guardian App is downloaded, login using your user
name and password. You will need your four digit SiriusXM Guardian Security PIN to
confirm the request. Press the “closed lock” icon on your SiriusXM Guardian App to lock
the doors, and press the “open lock” icon to unlock the driver’s door.
You can set-up notifications for your account to receive an email or text (SMS) message
every time a command is sent. Login to Mopar Owner Connect moparownerconnect.com
and click on Edit Profile to manage SiriusXM Guardian Notifications.
Remote Horn And Lights — It’s easy to locate a vehicle in a dark, crowded or noisy parking
area by activating the horn and lights. It may also help if you need to draw attention to your
vehicle for any reason. You can send a request to your vehicle in one of three ways:
1. Using the SiriusXM Guardian App from a compatible device.
2. From the Mopar Owner Connect website.
3. By contacting the SiriusXM Guardian Care on the phone.
To use this feature after the SiriusXM Guardian App is downloaded, login using your user
name and password. You will need your four digit SiriusXM Guardian Security PIN to
confirm the request. You can set-up notifications for your account to receive an email or
text (SMS) message every time a command is sent. Login to Mopar Owner Connect
moparownerconnect.com and click on Edit Profile to manage SiriusXM Guardian Notifi-
cations.
ELECTRONICS
105
Vehicle Finder — If you can’t find where you parked your vehicle you can use this feature
to help you find it. Use the SiriusXM Guardian mobile app to reference the GPS location
of your vehicle, and your own current GPS location. From there, you can route a path from
your location to your vehicle’s location, or activate its security alarm to better find it
location. You can only do this from the SiriusXM Guardian App.
Send & Go— If you want to send a navigation route from your mobile device, to your
vehicle’s navigation system, you can do so using this feature of the SiriusXM Guardian
App. You can even use the app to call the destination once a route is mapped. You can only
do this from the SiriusXM Guardian App.
ELECTRONICS
106
UCONNECT 5.0
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen, doing so can result in damage to the
screen.
Uconnect 5.0
1 — RADIO Mode Button
2 — MEDIA Mode Button
3 — Uconnect PHONE Button
4 — COMPASS Button
5 — CLIMATE Button
6 — MORE Button
ELECTRONICS
107
Clock Setting
To start the clock setting procedure, perform the following:
1. Push the MORE button on the faceplate. Next press the “Settings” button on the
touchscreen and then press the “Clock and Date” button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the “Set Time” button on the touchscreen.
3. Press the “Up” or “Down” arrows to adjust the hours or minutes, then select the “AM”
or “PM” button on the touchscreen. You can also select 12hr or 24hr format by
pressing the desired button on the touchscreen.
4. Once the time is set, press the “Done” button on the touchscreen to exit the time
screen.
NOTE:
In the Clock Setting Menu, you can also select “Display Clock”, which turns the clock
display in the status bar on or off.
Equalizer, Balance And Fade
1. Push the MORE button on the faceplate.
2. Press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen.
3. Scroll down and press the “Audio” button on the touchscreen to get to the Audio
menu.
4. The Audio Menu shows the following options for you to customize your audio settings.
Equalizer
• Press the “Equalizer” button on the touchscreen to adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble.
Use the “+” or “–” button on the touchscreen to adjust the equalizer to your desired
settings. Press the “Done” button on the touchscreen when finished.
Balance/Fade
• Press the “Balance/Fade” button on the touchscreen to adjust the sound from the
speakers. Use the “arrow” button on the touchscreen to adjust the sound level from the
front and rear or right and left side speakers. Press the Center “C” button on the
touchscreen to reset the balance and fade to the factory setting. Press the “Done”
button on the touchscreen when finished.
Speed Adjustable
• Press the “Speed Adjusted Volume” button on the touchscreen to select between OFF,
1, 2 or 3. This will decrease the radio volume relative to a decrease in vehicle speed.
Press the “Done” button on the touchscreen when finished.
Loudness
• Press the “Loudness” button on the touchscreen to select the Loudness feature. When
this feature is activated it improves sound quality at lower volumes.
ELECTRONICS
108
Radio Operation
Seek Up/Down Buttons
• Press the up or down button to seek through radio stations in AM, FM or SXM bands.
• Hold either button to bypass stations without stopping.
Store Radio Presets Manually
The Radio stores up to 12 presets in each of the Radio modes. There are four visible
presets at the top of the radio screen. Pressing the “All” button on the touchscreen on the
radio home screen will display all of the preset stations for that mode.
To store a radio preset manually, follow the steps below:
1. Tune to the desired station.
2. Press and hold the desired preset button on the touchscreen for more that two seconds
or until you hear a confirmation beep.
Uconnect 5.0 Radio Screen
1 — Radio Station Presets
2 — Show All Presets
3 — Seek Up
4 — Audio Settings
5 — Station Info
6 — Direct Tune
7 — Radio Band
8 — Seek Down
ELECTRONICS
109
SiriusXM Premier Over 160 channels
Get every channel available on your satellite radio, and enjoy all you want, all in one place.
Hear commercial-free music plus sports, news, talk and entertainment. Get all the
premium programming, including Howard Stern, every NFL game, Oprah Radio, every
MLB and NHL game, every NASCAR race, Martha Stewart and more. And get 20+ extra
channels, including SiriusXM Latino, offering 20 channels of commercial free music,
news, talk, comedy, sports and more dedicated to Spanish language programming.
To access SiriusXM Satellite Radio, push the RADIO button on the faceplate and then the
SXM button on the touchscreen.
SiriusXM services require subscriptions, sold separately after the 12-month trial included
with the new vehicle purchase. If you decide to continue your service at the end of your
trial subscription, the plan you choose will automatically renew and bill at then-current
rates until you call SiriusXM at 1-866-635-2349 for U.S. residents and 1-888-539-7474
for Canadian residents to cancel. See SiriusXM Customer Agreement for complete terms
at www.siriusxm.com for U.S. residents and www.siriusxm.ca for Canadian residents. All
fees and programming subject to change. Our satellite service is available only to those at
least 18 and older in the 48 contiguous USA and D.C. Our Sirius satellite service is also
available in PR (with coverage limitations). Our Internet radio service is available
throughout our satellite service area and in AK and HI. © 2016 Sirius XM Radio Inc.
Sirius, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc.
USB/Audio Jack (AUX) — If Equipped
To select a specific audio source, push the
MEDIA button on the faceplate. To allow
music to play from your device through the
vehicle’s speakers, press the “Source” but-
ton then select one of the following modes:
USB/iPod
• USB/iPod Mode is entered by either in-
serting a USB Jump Drive or iPod cable
into the USB port or by pushing the
MEDIA button on the faceplate located
left of the display.
Audio Jack (AUX)
• The AUX allows a device, such as an MP3 player or an iPod, to be plugged into the radio
and utilize the vehicle’s audio system, using a 3.5 mm audio cable, to amplify the
source and play through the vehicle speakers.
• The functions of the device are controlled using the device buttons, not the buttons on
the radio. The volume may be controlled using the radio or device.
SD Card
Uconnect Media Hub
1 — AUX Port
2 — USB Port
3 — SD Card Slot
ELECTRONICS
110
• Play songs stored on an SD card inserted into the SD card slot.
• Song playback can be controlled using the radio or Steering Wheel Audio Controls to
play, skip to the next or previous track, browse, and list the contents.
Bluetooth
• If using a Bluetooth-equipped device, you may also be able to stream music to your
vehicle's sound system.
UCONNECT 5.0 VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
Introducing Uconnect
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these helpful quick tips. It provides the key
Voice Commands and tips you need to know to control your Uconnect 5.0 system.
Key Features:
• 5” touchscreen
• Three buttons on either side of the display
Get Started
1. U.S. residents can visit UconnectPhone.com to check device and feature compatibility
and to find device pairing instructions.
2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger conversations are examples of noise
that may impact recognition.
Uconnect 5.0
ELECTRONICS
111
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing straight ahead. The micro-
phone is positioned on the headliner and aimed at the driver.
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first push either the VR or Phone
button, wait until after the beep, then say your Voice Command.
5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts by pushing the VR or Phone
button and saying a Voice Command from current category.
All you need to control your Uconnect system with your voice are the buttons on your
steering wheel.
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any point while using your Uconnect
system.
Push the VR button . After the beep, say:
•Cancel to stop a current voice session
•Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
•Repeat to listen to the system prompts again
Uconnect VR/Phone Buttons
1 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Receive A Text
2 — Push To Begin Radio Or Media Functions
3 — Push To End Call
ELECTRONICS
112
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice recognition system’s status. Cues
appear on the touchscreen.
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM Satellite Radio stations you would
like to hear. (Subscription or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button . After the beep, say:
•Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM
•Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1
TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or want to learn a Voice Command, push
the VR button and say “Help.” The system will provide you with a list of commands.
Uconnect 5.0 Visual Cues
ELECTRONICS
113
Media
Uconnect offers connections via USB, SD, Bluetooth and auxiliary ports (If Equipped).
Voice operation is only available for connected USB and iPod devices.
Push the VR button . After the beep, say one of the following commands and follow
the prompts to switch your media source or choose an artist.
•Change source to Bluetooth
•Change source to iPod
•Change source to USB
•Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest Hits; Play song Moonlight Sonata; Play
genre Classical
TIP: Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all of the music on your iPod or
USB device. Your Voice Command must match exactly how the artist, album, song and
genre information is displayed.
Uconnect 5.0 Radio
ELECTRONICS
114
Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy with Uconnect. When the Phone-
book button is illuminated on your touchscreen, your system is ready.
U.S. residents can visit UconnectPhone.com to check device and feature compatibility
and to find device pairing instructions.
Push the Phone button . After the beep, say one of the following commands…
•Call John Smith
•Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts
•Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)
•Call back (call previous incoming phone number)
TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the Phone button and say “Call,” then
pronounce the name exactly as it appears in your phone book. When a contact has
multiple phone numbers, you can say “Call John Smith work.”
Uconnect 5.0 Media
ELECTRONICS
115
Voice Text Reply
Uconnect will announce incoming text messages. Push the Phone button and say
Listen. (Must have compatible device paired to Uconnect system.)
1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push the Phone button . After the
beep, say: Reply.
2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the beep, repeat one of the pre-defined
messages and follow the system prompts.
TIP: Your device must have the full implementation of the Message Access Profile (MAP)
to take advantage of this feature. For details about MAP, visit UconnectPhone.com for
U.S. residents. Apple iPhone iOS6 or later supports reading incoming text messages only.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Yes. Stuck in traffic. See you later.
No. Start without me. I’ll be late.
Okay. Where are you? I will be <number> minutes
late.
Call me. Are you there yet?
I’ll call you later. I need directions. See you in <number> min-
utes.
I’m on my way. Can’t talk right now.
I’m lost. Thanks.
Uconnect 5.0 Phone
ELECTRONICS
116
Additional Information
© 2016 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar, Mopar Owner Connect and Uconnect are
registered trademarks of FCA US LLC. Android is a trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and
all related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc. Yelp, Yelp logo, Yelp
burst and related marks are registered trademarks of Yelp.
For Uconnect system support, visit DriveUconnect.com or call: 1-877-855-8400
(24 hours a day 7 days a week)
Uconnect Access Services Support: 1-855-792-4241. Please have your Uconnect
Security PIN ready when you call.
UCONNECT 8.4/8.4 NAV
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV At A Glance
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the Uconnect features, SiriusXM Guardian
services, and applications in this vehicle. Only use Uconnect features and SiriusXM
Guardian services when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
Uconnect 8.4 NAV Radio Screen
ELECTRONICS
117
CAUTION!
Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen, doing so can result in damage to the
screen.
Setting The Time
• Model 8.4 NAV synchronizes time automatically via GPS, so it should not require any
time adjustment. If you do need to set the time manually, follow the instructions below
for Model 8.4 NAV.
• For Model 8.4, turn the unit on, and then press the time display at the top of the screen.
Press “Yes.”
• If the time is not displayed at the top of the screen, press the “Settings” button on the
touchscreen. In the Settings screen, press the “Clock” button on the touchscreen, then
check or uncheck this option.
• Press “+” or “–” next to Set Time Hours and Set Time Minutes to adjust the time.
• If these features are not available, uncheck the Sync Time box.
• Press “X” to save your settings and exit out of the Clock Setting screen.
Background Themes
• Screen background themes are selectable from a pre-loaded list of themes. If you’d like
to set a theme, follow the instructions below.
• Press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen.
• Press the “Display” button on the touchscreen.
• Then press “Set Theme” button on the touchscreen and select a theme.
Audio Settings
• Press of the “Audio” button on the touchscreen to activate the Audio settings screen to
adjust Balance\Fade, Equalizer, and Speed Adjusted Volume.
• You can return to the Radio screen by pressing the “X” located at the top right.
Balance/Fade
• Press the “Balance/Fade” button on the touchscreen to Balance audio between the
front speakers or fade the audio between the rear and front speakers.
• Pressing the “Front,” “Rear,” “Left,” or “Right” buttons on the touchscreen or press
and drag the Speaker Icon to adjust the Balance/Fade.
Equalizer
• Press the “Equalizer” button on the touchscreen to activate the Equalizer screen.
• Press the “+” or “–” buttons on the touchscreen, or press and drag over the level bar
for each of the equalizer bands. The level value, which spans between plus or minus 9,
is displayed at the bottom of each of the Bands.
Speed Adjusted Volume
• Press the “Speed Adjusted Volume” button on the touchscreen to activate the Speed
ELECTRONICS
118
Adjusted Volume screen. The Speed Adjusted Volume is adjusted by pressing the
volume level indicator. This alters the automatic adjustment of the audio volume with
variation to vehicle speed.
Personalized Menu Bar
The Uconnect features and services in the main menu bar are easily changed for your
convenience. Simply follow these steps:
1. Press the “Apps ” button to open the App screen.
2. Press and hold, then drag the selected App to replace an existing shortcut in the main
menu bar.
The new app shortcut, that was dragged down onto the main menu bar, will now be an
active App/shortcut.
NOTE:
This feature is only available if the vehicle is in PARK.
Radio
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Main Menu
ELECTRONICS
119
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the Uconnect features, SiriusXM Guardian
services, and applications in this vehicle. Only use Uconnect features and SiriusXM
Guardian services when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
• To access the Radio mode, press the “Radio” button on the touchscreen.
Selecting Radio Stations
• Press the desired radio band (AM, FM or SXM) button on the touchscreen.
Seek Up/Seek Down
• Press the Seek up or down arrow buttons on the touchscreen for less than two seconds
to seek through radio stations.
Uconnect 8.4 NAV Radio
1 — Radio Station Presets
2 — Toggle Between Presets
3 — Status Bar
4 — View Small Navigation Map
5 — HD Radio
6 — Main Category Bar
7 — Audio Settings
8 — Seek Up
9 — Direct Tune To A Radio Station
10 — Seek Down
11 — Browse And Manage Presets
12 — Radio Bands
ELECTRONICS
120
• Press and hold either arrow button on the touchscreen for more than two seconds to
bypass stations without stopping. The radio will stop at the next listenable station once
the arrow button on the touchscreen is released.
Direct Tune
• Tune directly to a radio station by pressing the “Tune” button on the screen, and
entering the desired station number.
Store Radio Presets Manually
Your radio can store 36 total preset stations, 12 presets per band (AM, FM and SXM).
They are shown at the top of your radio screen. To see the 12 preset stations per band,
press the arrow button on the touchscreen at the top right of the screen to toggle between
the two sets of six presets.
To store a radio preset manually, follow the steps below:
1. Tune to the desired station.
2. Press and hold the desired numbered button on the touchscreen for more than two
seconds or until you hear a confirmation beep.
HD Radio — If Equipped
• HD Radio (available on Uconnect 8.4 NAV) operates similar to conventional radio
except it allows broadcasters to transmit a high-quality digital signal.
• With an HD radio receiver, the listener is provided with a clear sound that enhances the
listening experience. HD radio can also transmit data such as song title or artist.
SiriusXM Premier Over 160 Channels
Get every channel available on your satellite radio, and enjoy all you want, all in one place.
Hear commercial-free music plus sports, news, talk and entertainment. Get all the
premium programming, including Howard Stern, every NFL game, Oprah Radio, every
MLB and NHL game, every NASCAR race, Martha Stewart and more. And get 20+ extra
channels, including SiriusXM Latino, offering 20 channels of commercial free music,
news, talk, comedy, sports and more dedicated to Spanish language programming.
• To access SiriusXM Satellite Radio, press the “SXM” button on the touchscreen on the
main Radio screen.
The following describes features that are available when in SiriusXM Satellite Radio
mode:
Seek Up/Seek Down
• Press the Seek arrow buttons on the touchscreen for less than two seconds to seek
through channels in SXM mode.
• Press and hold either arrow button on the touchscreen for more than two seconds to
bypass channels without stopping. The radio will stop at the next listenable channel
once the arrow button on the touchscreen is released.
Direct Tune
ELECTRONICS
121
• Tune directly to a SXM channel by pressing the “Tune” button on the touchscreen on
the screen, and entering the desired station number.
Tune Start
• The Tune Start feature begins playing a song from the beginning when you tune to your
favorite preset SXM channel. Tune Start can be enabled or disabled through the
SiriusXM setup page.
Jump
• Automatically tells you when Traffic & Weather for a favorite city is available, and gives
you the option to switch to that channel. Press “Jump” to activate the feature. After
listening to Traffic and Weather, press “Jump” again to return to the previous channel.
Fav
• Activates the favorites menu. You can add up to 50 favorite artists or songs. Just press
“Add Fav Artist” or “Add Fav Song” while the song is playing. You will then be alerted
any time one of these songs, or works by these artists, is playing on other SiriusXM
channels.
Album Art
• When arriving at a station, the Channel Art will be displayed to the left of the station
information. After 5 seconds the Channel Art will be replaced with the Album Art (if
available).
SiriusXM Parental Controls
• You can skip or hide certain channels from view if you do not want access to them.
Press the “Apps” button on the touchscreen, then the “Settings” button on the
touchscreen, next press the “Sirius Setup” button on the touchscreen, then select
Channel Skip. Press the box check-mark next to the channel you want skipped. They
will not show up in normal usage.
• SiriusXM also offers the option to permanently block selected channels. Call
(1-888-601-6297 for U.S. customers, 1-877-438-9677 for Canadian customers)
and request the Family-Friendly Package.
Browse
Lets you browse the SiriusXM channel listing or Genre listing. Favorites, Game Zone,
Weather and Jump settings also provide a way to browse the SiriusXM channel list.
Browse Sub-
Menu
Sub-Menu Description
All Shows the channel listing.
Genre Provides a list of all genres, and lets you jump to a channel within the selected
genre.
Presets Lets you scroll the list of Preset satellite channels. Press the channel, or press
Enter on the Tune knob, to go to that channel. Press the trash can icon to
delete a preset. Your presets are also shown at the top of the main Satellite
Radio screen.
ELECTRONICS
122
Favorites Lets you manage artists and songs in the Favorites list and configure Alert
Settings to let you know when favorite songs or artists are playing on other
channels. Also, view a list of channels airing any of your Favorites.
Game Zone Provides alerts when your favorite sports teams are starting a game which is
being aired on other SiriusXM channels, or when their game score is an-
nounced. You can select and manage your Teams list here, and configure
alerts.
Jump Lets you select your favorite cities for Traffic & Weather information, which is
used by the Jump feature on the main satellite radio screen.
Replay
Lets you replay up to 44 minutes of the content of the current SiriusXM channel.
Replay Op-
tion
Option Description
Play/Pause Press to Pause content playback. Press Pause/Play again to resume playback.
Rewind/RW Rewinds the channel content in steps of five seconds. Press and hold to
rewind continuously, then release to begin playing content at that point.
Fast
Forward/FW
Forwards the content, and works similarly to Rewind/RW. However, Fast
Forward/FW can only be used when content has been previously rewound.
Replay Time Displays the amount of time in the upper center of the screen by which your
content lags the Live channel.
Live Resumes playback of Live content at any time while replaying rewound
content.
• SiriusXM services require subscriptions, sold separately after the 12-month trial
included with the new vehicle purchase. If you decide to continue your service at the
end of your trial subscription, the plan you choose will automatically renew and bill at
then-current rates until you call SiriusXM at 1-866-635-2349 for U.S. residents and
1-888-539-7474 for Canadian residents to cancel. See SiriusXM Customer Agreement
for complete terms at www.siriusxm.com (U.S. residents) or siriusxm.ca (Canadian
residents). All fees and programming subject to change. Our satellite service is
available only to those at least 18 and older in the 48 contiguous USA and D.C. Our
Sirius satellite service is also available in PR (with coverage limitations). Our Internet
radio service is available throughout our satellite service area and in AK and HI.
©2016 Sirius XM Radio Inc. Sirius, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks
of Sirius XM Radio Inc.
Media Hub — USB/Audio Jack (AUX) — If Equipped
ELECTRONICS
123
There are many ways to play music from
MP3 players or USB devices through your
vehicle's sound system. Press your Media
button on the touchscreen to begin.
Audio Jack (AUX)
• The AUX allows a device to be plugged
into the radio and utilize the vehicle’s
sound system, using a 3.5 mm audio
cable, to amplify the source and play
through the vehicle speakers.
• Pressing the “AUX” button on the touch-
screen will change the mode to auxiliary
device if the audio jack is connected,
allowing the music from your device to
be heard through the vehicle's speakers.
To activate the AUX, plug in the audio
jack.
• The functions of the device are con-
trolled using the device buttons. The
volume may be controlled using the ra-
dio or device.
• To route the audio cable out of the center console, use the access cut out in the front
of the console.
USB Port
• Connect your compatible device using a USB cable into the USB Port. USB Memory
sticks with audio files can also be used. Audio from the device can be played on the
vehicles sound system while providing metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.)
information on the radio display.
• When connected, the compatible USB device can be controlled using the radio or
Steering Wheel Audio Controls to play, skip to the next or previous track, browse, and
list the contents.
• The battery charges when plugged into the USB port (if supported by the specific
device).
• To route the USB cable out of the center console, use the access cut out.
Uconnect Media Hub
1 — USB Port One
2 — Audio/AUX Jack
3 — USB Port Two
ELECTRONICS
124
NOTE:
When connecting your device for the first time, the system may take several minutes to
read your music, depending on the number of files. For example, the system will take
approximately five minutes for every 1,000 songs loaded on the device. Also during the
reading process, the Shuffle and Browse functions will be disabled. This process is
needed to ensure the full use of your features and only happens the first time it is
connected. After the first time, the reading process of your device will take considerably
less time unless changes are made or new songs are added to the playlist.
Bluetooth Streaming Audio
• If equipped with Uconnect Voice Command, your Bluetooth-equipped device may also
be able to stream music to your vehicle's sound system. Your connected device must be
Bluetooth-compatible and paired with your system (see Uconnect Phone for pairing
instructions). You can access the music from your connected Bluetooth device by
pressing the Bluetooth button on the touchscreen while in Media mode.
Media Controls
The controls are accessed by pressing the desired button on the touchscreen and choosing
Media Controls
1 — Repeat Music Track
2 — Music Track And Time
3 — Shuffle Music Tracks
4 — Music Track Information
5 — Show Songs Currently In Queue To
Be Played
6 — Browse Music By
7 — Music Source
ELECTRONICS
125
between AUX, USB, or Bluetooth.
NOTE:
Uconnect will automatically switch to the appropriate mode when something is first
connected or inserted into the system.
Android Auto
Android Auto is a feature of your Uconnect system, and your Android 5.0 (Lollipop), or
higher, powered smartphone with a data plan, that allows you to project your smartphone
and a number of its apps onto the touchscreen radio display. Android Auto automatically
brings you useful information, and organizes it into simple cards that appear just when
they are needed. Android Auto can be used with Android’s best-in-class speech technol-
ogy, the steering wheel controls, the knobs and buttons on your radio faceplate, and the
radio display’s touchscreen to control many of your apps. To use Android Auto follow the
following procedure:
1. Download the Android Auto app from the Google Play store on your Android powered
smartphone.
2. Connect your Android powered smartphone to one of the media USB ports in your
vehicle. If the Android Auto app was not downloaded, the first time you plug your
device in, the app will begin to download.
NOTE:
Be sure to use the factory-provided USB cable, as aftermarket cables may not work.
3. Once the device is connected and rec-
ognized, the “Phone” icon on the per-
sonalized menu bar will automatically
change to the Android Auto Icon. If it
does not appear automatically, refer to
“Android Auto And Apple CarPlay Tips
And Tricks” in “Uconnect 8.4/8.4NAV”
for the procedure to enable the feature
“AutoShow”. Android Auto should
launch automatically, but if not, touch
the Android Auto icon on the touch-
screen to launch it.
Once Android Auto is up and running on your Uconnect radio, the following features can
be utilized using your smartphone’s data plan:
• Google Maps for navigation
• Google Play Music, Spotify, iHeart, etc. for music
• Handsfree Calling, and Texting for communication
• Many more apps
Android Auto
ELECTRONICS
126
NOTE:
To use Android Auto make sure you are in an area with cellular coverage. Your data and
cellular coverage is shown in the top bar of the radio screen.
Maps
To use your Google Maps for navigation on
your Uconnect system, launch Android
Auto, and push and hold the VR button on
the steering wheel to use voice commands
to set your desired destination. You can also
press the microphone icon, within Android
Auto, to activate Android Auto VR. Google
Maps can also be accessed by pressing the
“Maps” button inside of Android Auto.
NOTE:
If the VR button is not held, and is only pushed, the native Uconnect VR will prompt you
and any navigation command said will launch the native Uconnect navigation system.
While using Android Auto, Google Maps provides voice-guided:
• Navigation
• Live traffic information
• Lane guidance
NOTE:
If you are using the native Uconnect navi-
gation system, and you try and start a new
route using the Android Auto system, via
voice or any other method, a pop-up will
appear asking if you would like to switch
from Uconnect navigation to smartphone
navigation. A pop-up will also appear, ask-
ing if you’d like to switch, if an Android Auto
navigation is currently in use and you at-
tempt to launch a native Uconnect route.
Selecting “Yes” will switch the navigation
type to the newly used method of navigation and a route will be planned for the new
destination. If “No” is selected the navigation type will remain unchanged.
For further information refer to www.android.com/auto/.
Music
Android Auto allows you to access and stream your favorite music with apps like Google
Play Music, iHeartRadio, and Spotify. Using your smartphone’s data plan, you can stream
endless music on the road. Android Auto comes with a 30–day free trial subscription to
Google Play Music, which provides access to millions of songs, ad-free.
Android Auto Data and Cellular Coverage
Android Auto Maps
ELECTRONICS
127
NOTE:
Music apps, playlists, and stations must be set up on your smartphone prior to using
Android Auto, for them to work with Android Auto.
NOTE:
To see the metadata for the music playing
through Android Auto, select the Uconnect
System’s media screen.
For further information refer to
www.android.com/auto/.
Communication
With Android Auto connected, press and
hold the VR button on the steering wheel to
activate voice recognition specific to the
Android Auto system. This will allow you to send and reply to text messages, have
incoming text messages read out loud, and place and receive hands-free calls.
Apps
The Android Auto App will display all the
compatible apps that are available for
download and use with the Android Auto
System, every time it is launched. You must
have the compatible app downloaded, and
you must be signed in to the app for it to
work with the Android Auto system. Refer to
https://play.google.com/store/apps/collection/promotion_3001303_android_auto_all
to see the latest list of available apps for
Android Auto.
Apple CarPlay
Apple Car is a feature of your Uconnect
System, and iPhone 5, or higher, that uses
your smartphone’s data plan to allow you to
project your iPhone and a number of its
apps onto the touchscreen radio display.
Apple CarPlay lets you use your iPhone in
the car in a way that allows you to stay
focused on the road. Apple CarPlay allows
you to use Siri through your vehicle’s voice
recognition system, the vehicle’s knobs and controls, along with and touchscreen to
control many iPhone apps. To use Apple CarPlay, make sure your iPhone is unlocked, Siri
is enabled in the settings, then use the following procedure:
1. Connect your Apple iPhone to one of the media USB ports in your vehicle.
Android Auto Music
Android Auto Phone
Android Auto Contact
ELECTRONICS
128
NOTE:
Be sure to use the factory-provided Lightning cable, as aftermarket cables may not work.
2. Once the device is connected and recognized, the “Phone” icon on the personalized
menu bar will automatically change to the Apple CarPlay Icon. If it does not appear
automatically, refer to “Android Auto And Apple CarPlay Tips And Tricks” in “Uconnect
8.4/8.4NAV” for the procedure to enable the feature “AutoShow”. Apple CarPlay
should launch automatically, but if not, touch the Apple CarPlay icon on the touch-
screen to launch it.
3. Your iPhone’s screen will be locked out
for the entire time it is connected to the
Uconnect System, and you can begin
using CarPlay via voice or touchscreen.
Once Apple CarPlay is up and running on
your Uconnect radio, the following features
can be utilized using your iPhone’s data
plan:
• Phone
• Music
• Messages
• Maps
• Many more apps
NOTE:
To use Apple CarPlay make sure that cellular data is turned on, and that you are in an area
with cellular coverage. Your data and cellular coverage is shown on the left side of the radio
screen.
Phone
With Apple CarPlay, press and hold the VR
button on the steering wheel to activate a
Siri voice recognition session. You can also
press and hold the “Home” button, within
Apple CarPlay, to begin an Apple CarPlay
VR session. This will allow you to send and
receive calls as you would normally using
Siri on your iPhone.
Apple CarPlay
Apple CarPlay Data and Cellular Coverage
ELECTRONICS
129
NOTE:
Only temporarily pushing the VR button on the steering wheel will launch a native VR
session, not a Siri session, and it will not function with CarPlay.
Music
Apple CarPlay allows you to access all your artists, playlists, and music from iTunes, and
Beats music. Using your smartphone’s data plan, you can also stream “Apple approved”
Internet Radio, and audio books.
NOTE:
Access to some files may be limited in Apple CarPlay, due to Apple’s lockout features.
Messages
Just like Phone, Apple CarPlay allows you to
use Siri to send or reply to text messages.
Siri can also read incoming text messages,
but driver’s will not be able to read mes-
sages, as everything is done via voice.
Maps
To use your Apple Maps for navigation on
your Uconnect system, launch Apple Car-
Play, and push and hold the VR button on
the steering wheel to use Siri to set your desired destination.
NOTE:
• If the VR button is not held, and is only
pushed, the native Uconnect VR will
prompt you and any navigation com-
mand said will launch the native
Uconnect navigation system.
• If you are using the native Uconnect
navigation system, and you try and start
a new route using the Apple CarPlay
system, via voice or any other method, a
pop-up will appear asking if you would like to switch from Uconnect navigation to
iPhone navigation. A pop-up will also appear, asking if you’d like to switch, if an Apple
CarPlay navigation is currently in use and you attempt to launch a native Uconnect
route. Selecting “Yes” will switch the navigation type to the newly used method of
navigation and a route will be planned for the new destination. If “No” is selected the
navigation type will remain unchanged.
Apple CarPlay Music
ELECTRONICS
130
Apps
To use a compatible app with the Apple
CarPlay system, you must have the compat-
ible app downloaded, and you must be
signed in to the app. Refer to http://
www.apple.com/ios/carplay/ to see the lat-
est list of available apps for Apple CarPlay.
Navigation
• The information in the section below is
only applicable if you have the 8.4 NAV
system or the Navigation has been acti-
vated on your 8.4 system.
• If you have a Uconnect 8.4 system your radio is “Navigation-Ready,” and can be
equipped with Navigation at an extra cost. Please see your dealer for details.
Press the “Nav” button on the touchscreen in the menu bar to access the Navigation
system.
Changing The Navigation Voice Prompt Volume
1. Press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen in the lower right area of the screen.
2. In the Settings menu, press the “Guidance” button on the touchscreen.
3. In the Guidance menu, adjust the Nav Volume by pressing the “+” or “–” buttons on
the touchscreen.
Navigation Pop-up
ELECTRONICS
131
Finding Points Of Interest
• From the main Navigation menu, press the “Where To?” button on the touchscreen,
then press the “Points of Interest” button on the touchscreen.
• Select a category and then a subcategory, if necessary.
• Select your destination and press the “GO!” button on the touchscreen.
Finding A Place By Spelling The Name
• From the Main Navigation Menu press the “Where to?” button on the touchscreen,
press the “Points of Interest” button on the touchscreen, then press the “Spell Name”
button on the touchscreen.
• Enter the name of your destination.
• Press the “List” button on the touchscreen.
• Select your destination and press the “GO!” button on the touchscreen.
One-Step Voice Destination Entry
Uconnect 8.4 NAV Navigation
1 — Search For A Destination In All
Categories
2 — Find A Destination
3 — View Map
4 — Navigate To Saved Home Destina-
tion
5 — Navigate To Saved Work Destina-
tion
6 — Navigation Settings
7 — Emergency
8 — InformationRepeat Route Guid-
ance Prompt
ELECTRONICS
132
• Enter a navigation destination without taking your hands off the wheel.
• Just push the Uconnect Voice Command button on the steering wheel, wait for
the beep and say something like, "Find Address 800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills MI."
NOTE:
Destination entry is not available while your vehicle is in motion. However, you can also
use Voice Commands to enter an address while moving. Refer to “Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV
Voice Recognition Quick Tips” in this section for further information.
Setting Your Home Location
• Press the “Nav” button on the touchscreen in the menu bar to access the Navigation
system and the Main Navigation menu.
• Press the “Home” button on the touchscreen.
• You may enter your address directly, use your current location as your home address, or
choose from recently found locations.
• To delete your Home location (or other saved locations) so you can save a new Home
location, press the “Home” button on the touchscreen, and in the “GO!” screen press
the “Options” button on the touchscreen. In the Options menu press the “Clear Home”
button on the touchscreen. Set a new Home location by following the previous
instructions.
Home
• A Home location must be saved in the system. From the Main Navigation menu, press
the “Home” button on the touchscreen.
ELECTRONICS
133
Your route is marked with a blue line on the map. If you depart from the original route, your
route is recalculated. A speed limit icon could appear as you travel on major roadways.
Adding A Stop
• To add a stop you must be navigating a route.
• Press the “Menu” button on the touchscreen to return to the Main Navigation menu.
• Press the “Where To?” button on the touchscreen, then search for the extra stop. When
another location has been selected, you can choose to cancel your previous route, add
as the first destination or add as the last destination.
• Press the desired selection and press the “GO!” button on the touchscreen.
Taking A Detour
• To take a detour you must be navigating a route.
• Press the “Detour” button on the touchscreen.
Uconnect 8.4 NAV Map
1 — Distance To Next Turn
2 — Next Turn Street
3 — Estimated Time Of Arrival
4 — Zoom In And Out
5 — Your Location On The Map
6 — Navigation Main Menu
7 — Current Street Location
8 — Navigation Routing Options
ELECTRONICS
134
NOTE:
If the route you are currently taking is the only reasonable option, the device may not
calculate a detour. For more information, see your Uconnect Owner's Manual Supple-
ment.
SiriusXM Traffic (8.4 NAV & US Market Only)
Don't Drive Through Traffic. Drive Around It.
Avoid congestion before you reach it. By enhancing your vehicle's navigation system with
the ability to see detailed traffic information, you can pinpoint traffic incidents, determine
average traffic speed and estimate travel time along your route. Since the service is
integrated with a vehicle's navigation system, SiriusXM Traffic can help drivers pick the
fastest route based on traffic conditions.
• Detailed information on traffic speed, accidents, construction, and road closings.
• Traffic information from multiple sources, including police and emergency services,
cameras and road sensors.
• Coast-to-coast delivery of traffic information.
• View conditions for points along your route and beyond. Available in over 130 markets.
SiriusXM Travel Link (8.4 NAV & US Market Only)
In addition to delivering over 130 channels of the best sports, entertainment, talk, and
commercial-free music, SiriusXM offers premium data services that work in conjunction
with compatible navigation systems. SiriusXM Travel Link brings a wealth of useful
information into your vehicle and right to your fingertips.
•Fuel Prices — Check local gas and diesel prices in your area and route to the station of
your choice.
•Movie Listings — Check local movie theatres and listings in your area and route to the
theater of your choice.
•Sports Scores — In-game and final scores as well as weekly schedules.
•Weather — Check variety of local and national weather information from radar maps to
current and 5-day forecast.
SiriusXM Travel Link feature is completely integrated into your vehicle. A few minutes
after you start your vehicle, Travel Link information arrives and updates in the background.
You can access the information whenever you like, with no waiting.
To access SiriusXM Travel Link, press “Apps” button on the touchscreen, then press the
“SiriusXM Travel Link” button on the touchscreen.
ELECTRONICS
135
NOTE:
SiriusXM Travel Link requires a subscription, sold separately after the five (5) year trial
subscription included with your vehicle purchase.
SiriusXM Travel Link is only available in the United States.
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
Introducing Uconnect
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these helpful quick tips. It provides the key
Voice Commands and tips you need to know to control your Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV
system.
If you see the icon on your touchscreen, you have the Uconnect 8.4 NAV system. If
not, you have a Uconnect 8.4 system.
Get Started
All you need to control your Uconnect system with your voice are the buttons on your
steering wheel.
1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and feature compatibility and to
find phone pairing instructions.
2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger conversations are examples of noise
that may impact recognition.
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing straight ahead. The micro-
phone is positioned on the rearview mirror and aimed at the driver.
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first push either the VR or Phone
button, wait until after the beep, then say your Voice Command.
5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts by pushing the VR or Phone
button and saying a Voice Command from current category.
ELECTRONICS
136
1. Uconnect Phone Button , Push to initiate, answer, or end a phone call, send or
receive a text.
2. Uconnect Voice Recognition Button .
a. Short Press: Push and release the VR button to begin Radio, Climate, Navigation,
and other embedded functions. After you hear the single beep, say a command.
b. Long Press: Push and hold continuously for a few milliseconds, then release the
VR button for Siri functions. After you hear the familiar Siri "double beep," say a
command.
3. Phone Hang Up Button.
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any point while using your Uconnect
system.
Push the VR button . After the beep, say…
•Cancel to stop a current voice session
•Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
•Repeat to listen to the system prompts again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice recognition system’s status. Cues
appear on the touchscreen.
Uconnect VR And Phone Buttons
ELECTRONICS
137
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM Satellite Radio stations you would
like to hear. (Subscription or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button . After the beep, say…
•Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM
•Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1
TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or want to learn a Voice Command, push
the VR button and say “Help.” The system will provide you with a list of commands.
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV
ELECTRONICS
138
Media
Uconnect offers connections via USB, Bluetooth and auxiliary ports (If Equipped). Voice
operation is only available for connected USB and AUX devices. (Remote CD player
optional and not available on all vehicles.)
Push the VR button . After the beep, say one of the following commands and follow
the prompts to switch your media source or choose an artist.
•Change source to Bluetooth
•Change source to AUX
•Change source to USB
•Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest Hits; Play song Moonlight Sonata; Play
genre Classical
TIP: Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all of the music on your AUX or
USB device. Your Voice Command must match exactly how the artist, album, song and
genre information is displayed.
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Radio
ELECTRONICS
139
Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy with Uconnect. When the Phone-
book button is illuminated on your touchscreen, your system is ready. Check
UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and pairing instructions.
Push the Phone button . After the beep, say one of the following commands…
•Call John Smith
•Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts
•Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)
•Call back (call previous incoming phone number)
TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the Phone button and say “Call,”
then pronounce the name exactly as it appears in your phone book. When a contact has
multiple phone numbers, you can say “Call John Smith work.”
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Media
ELECTRONICS
140
Climate (8.4/8.4 NAV)
Too hot? Too cold? Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and keep everyone comfortable
while you keep moving ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with climate control.)
Push the VR button . After the beep, say one of the following commands:
•Set driver temperature to 70 degrees
•Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees
TIP: Voice Command for Climate may only be used to adjust the interior temperature of
your vehicle. Voice Command will not work to adjust the heated seats or steering wheel if
equipped.
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Phone
ELECTRONICS
141
Navigation (8.4/8.4 NAV)
The Uconnect navigation feature helps you save time and become more productive when
you know exactly how to get to where you want to go. (Navigation is optional on the
Uconnect 8.4 system. See your dealer to activate navigation at any time.)
1. To enter a destination, push the VR button . After the beep, say:
• For the 8.4 Uconnect System, say: “Enter state.”
• For the 8.4 NAV Uconnect System, say: “Find address 800 Chrysler Drive Auburn
Hills, Michigan.”
2. Then follow the system prompts.
TIP: To start a POI search, push the VR button . After the beep, say: “Find nearest
coffee shop.”
SiriusXM Guardian
WARNING!
Some SiriusXM Guardian services, including SOS Call and ASSIST will NOT work
without an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network connection.
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Climate
ELECTRONICS
142
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by the subscriber.
An included trial and/or subscription is required to take advantage of the SiriusXM
Guardian services in the next section of this guide. To register with SiriusXM Guardian,
press the Apps button on the 8.4-inch touchscreen to get started.
NOTE:
SiriusXM Guardian is available only on equipped vehicles purchased within the continen-
tal United States, Alaska and Hawaii. Services can only be used where coverage is
available; see coverage map for details.
SOS Call
Theft Alarm Notification
Remote Door Lock/Unlock
Send & Go
Vehicle Finder
Stolen Vehicle Assistance
Remote Vehicle Start**
Remote Horn & Lights
Roadside Assistance Call
Vehicle Health Reports**
Vehicle Health Alert**
Performance Pages Plus**
**If vehicle is equipped.
Register
To unlock the full potential of SiriusXM Guardian in your vehicle, you first need to register
with SiriusXM Guardian.
1. Push the ASSIST button on your rearview mirror.
ELECTRONICS
143
2. Press the “SiriusXM Guardian Care”
button on the touchscreen.
3. A helpful SiriusXM Guardian Care Agent
will register your vehicle and handle all
of the details.
Signing up is easy! Simply follow the steps
above. Or, press the “Apps ” button on
the touchscreen to “Register By Web” to
complete the process using your smart-
phone or computer.
For further information please visit
www.driveuconnect.com
Vehicle Health Report/Alert
Your vehicle will send you a monthly email
report, which summarizes the performance of your vehicle’s key systems so you can stay
on top of your vehicle’s maintenance needs. Your vehicle will also send you Vehicle Health
Alerts when it detects issues with its key systems that need your attention. For further
information go to the your Owner Site website (owners.dodge.com, or
owners.chrysler.com).
Mobile App
You’re only a few steps away from using remote commands and playing your favorite music
in your car.
To use the SiriusXM Guardian App:
• Download the SiriusXM Guardian App to
your mobile device.
• Press the Info button on the navigation
bar at the bottom of the app for Vehicle
Info.
• Press the Remote button on the naviga-
tion bar at the bottom of the app to
Lock/Unlock, Remote Start, and activate
your horn and lights remotely.
• Press the Location button on the naviga-
tion bar at the bottom of the app to bring
up a map to loacte your vehicle or send a
location to your vehicle’s navigation sys-
tem.
• Press the Settings button in the upper left corner of the app to bring up app settings
and access the Assist Call Centers.
Rearview Mirror
Mobile App
ELECTRONICS
144
NOTE:
For further information please visit DriveUconnect.com.
SiriusXM Travel Link (8.4/8.4 NAV)
Need to find a gas station, view local movie listings, check a sports score or the5-day
weather forecast? SiriusXM Travel Link is a suite of services that brings a wealth of
information right to your Uconnect 8.4 NAV system. (Not available for 8.4 system.)
Push the VR button . After the beep, say one of the following commands:
•Show fuel prices
•Show 5 - day weather forecast
ELECTRONICS
145
•Show extended weather
TIP: Traffic alerts are not accessible with Voice Command.
Apple CarPlay (8.4/8.4 NAV)
Apple CarPlay allows you to use your voice to interact with Siri through your vehicle’s voice
recognition system, and use your smartphone’s data plan to project your iPhone and a
number of its apps onto your Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV touchscreen. Connect your iPhone 5,
or higher, to one of the media USB ports, using the factory-provided Lightning cable, and
press the new CarPlay icon that replaces your “Phone” icon on the main menu bar to
begin Apple CarPlay. Press and hold the VR button on the steering wheel, or press and
hold the “Home” button within Apple CarPlay, to activate Siri, which recognizes natural
voice commands to use a list of your iPhone’s features:
• Phone
• Music
• Messages
• Maps
• Additional Apps
SiriusXM Travel Link
ELECTRONICS
146
Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual
Supplement for further information.
Android Auto (8.4/8.4 NAV)
Android Auto allows you to use your voice to
interact with Android’s best-in-class speech
technology through your vehicle’s voice rec-
ognition system, and use your smartphone’s
data plan to project your Android powered
smartphone and a number of its apps onto
your Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV touchscreen.
Connect your Android 5.0 (Lollipop), or
higher, to one of the media USB ports, using the factory-provided USB cable, and press
the new Android Auto icon that replaces your “Phone” icon on the main menu bar to begin
Android Auto. Press and hold the VR button on the steering wheel, or press and hold the
“Microphone” icon within Android Auto, to activate Android’s VR, which recognizes
natural voice commands, to use a list of your smartphone’s features:
• Maps
• Music
• Phone
• Text Messages
• Additional Apps
Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual
Supplement for further information.
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part
15 and Industry Canada's licence-exempt
RSSs. Opera-tion is subject to the
following two condi-tions:
1. This device may not cause harmful in-
terference.
2. This device must accept any interfer-
ence that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules. Changes or
modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the device.
• The term IC before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry
Canada technical specifications were met.
Apple CarPlay
Android Auto
ELECTRONICS
147
Additional Information
© 2016 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and Uconnect are registered trademarks
and Mopar Owner Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android is a trademark of
Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio
Inc. Yelp, Yelp logo, Yelp burst and related marks are registered trademarks of Yelp.
Uconnect System Support:
• U.S. residents visit DriveUconnect.com or call: 1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day
7 days a week)
• Canadian residents visit DriveUconnect.ca or call: 1-800-465-2001 (English) or
1-800-387-9983 (French)
Mon. – Fri., 8:00 am – 8:00 pm, ET
Sat., 9:00 am – 5:00 pm, ET
Sun., Closed
Uconnect Access services support, call: 1-855-792-4241 Please have your Uconnect
Security PIN ready when you call.
UCONNECT PHONE
Uconnect Phone (Bluetooth Hands Free Calling)
ELECTRONICS
148
The Uconnect Phone feature enables you to place and receive hands-free mobile phone
calls. Drivers can also place mobile phone calls using their voice or by using the buttons
on the touchscreen (see Voice Command section).
The hands-free calling feature is made possible through Bluetooth technology — the
global standard that enables different electronic devices to connect to each other
wirelessly.
If the Uconnect Phone Button exists on your steering wheel, you then have the
Uconnect Phone features.
NOTE:
• The Uconnect Phone requires a mobile phone equipped with the Bluetooth Hands-
Free Profile, Version 1.0 or higher.
Uconnect 5.0 Phone Menu
1 — Call/Redial/Hold
2 — Mobile Phone Signal Strength
3 — Currently Paired Mobile Phone
4 — Mobile Phone Battery Life
5 — Mute Microphone
6 — Transfer To/From Uconnect Sys-
tem
7 — Uconnect Phone Settings Menu
8 — Text Messaging
9 — Direct Dial Pad
10 — Recent Call Log
11 — Browse Phone Book (Contains
9-1-1)
12 — End Call
ELECTRONICS
149
• Most mobile phones/devices are compatible with the Uconnect system, however some
mobile phones/devices may not be equipped with all of the required features to utilize
all of the Uconnect system features.
• For Uconnect Customer Care:
• U.S. residents visit UconnectPhone.com or call 1-877-855-8400.
Pairing (Wirelessly Connecting) Your Mobile Phone To The Uconnect System
Mobile phone pairing is the process of establishing a wireless connection between a
cellular phone and the Uconnect system.
NOTE:
• To use the Uconnect Phone feature, you first must determine if your mobile phone and
software are compatible with the Uconnect system. Please visit UconnectPhone.com
for complete mobile phone compatibility information.
• Mobile phone pairing is not available while the vehicle is in motion.
• A maximum of 10 mobile phones can be paired to the Uconnect system.
Start Pairing Procedure On The Radio
Uconnect 5.0:
1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON
position.
2. Press the “Phone” button.
3. Select “Settings.”
4. Select “Paired Phones.”
5. Select “Add device.”
• Uconnect Phone will display an “In
progress” screen while the system is
connecting.
Uconnect 8.4, 8.4 NAV:
1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON
position.
2. Press the “Phone” button in the Menu
Bar on the touchscreen.
3. Select “Settings.”
4. Select “Paired Phones.”
5. Select “Add device.”
• Uconnect Phone will display an “In
progress” screen while the system is
connecting.
Uconnect 5.0
Uconnect 8.4 & 8.4 NAV
ELECTRONICS
150
Pair Your iPhone:
To search for available devices on your
Bluetooth enabled iPhone:
1. Press the Settings button.
2. Select Bluetooth.
• Ensure the Bluetooth feature is en-
abled. Once enabled, the mobile
phone will begin to search for
Bluetooth connections.
3. When your mobile phone finds the
Uconnect system, select “Uconnect”.
Complete The iPhone Pairing Procedure:
1. When prompted on the mobile phone,
accept the connection request from
Uconnect Phone.
NOTE:
Some mobile phones will require you to
enter the PIN number.
Select The iPhone's Priority Level
When the pairing process has successfully
completed, the system will prompt you to
choose whether or not this is your favorite
mobile phone. Selecting “Yes” will make
this mobile phone the highest priority. This
mobile phone will take precedence over
other paired mobile phones within range and will connect to the Uconnect system
automatically when entering the vehicle. Only one mobile phone and/or one Bluetooth
audio device can be connected to the Uconnect system at a time. If “No” is selected,
simply select “Uconnect” from the mobile phone/audio device Bluetooth screen, and the
Uconnect system will reconnect to the Bluetooth device.
Pair Your Android Device:
Bluetooth On/Uconnect Device
Pairing Request
ELECTRONICS
151
To search for available devices on your
Bluetooth enabled Android Device:
1. Push the Menu button.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Connections.
4. Turn Bluetooth setting to “On.”
• Ensure the Bluetooth feature is en-
abled. Once enabled, the mobile
phone will begin to search for
Bluetooth connections.
5. Once your mobile phone finds the
Uconnect system, select “Uconnect”.
• You may be prompted by your mobile phone to download the phonebook, check “Do
Not Ask Again” to automatically download the phonebook. This is so you can make
calls by saying the name of your contact.
Complete The Android Pairing Procedure:
1. Confirm the passkey shown on the mo-
bile phone matches the passkey shown
on the Uconnect system then accept the
Bluetooth pairing request.
NOTE:
Some mobile phones require the PIN to be
entered manually, enter the PIN number
shown on the Uconnect screen.
Select The Android Mobile Phone's Priority
Level
When the pairing process has successfully
completed, the system will prompt you to
choose whether or not this is your favorite
mobile phone. Selecting “Yes” will make
this mobile phone the highest priority. This
mobile phone will take precedence over other paired mobile phones within range and will
connect to the Uconnect system automatically when entering the vehicle. Only one mobile
phone and/or one Bluetooth audio device can be connected to the Uconnect system at a
time. If “No” is selected, simply select “Uconnect” from the mobile phone/audio device
Bluetooth screen, and the Uconnect system will reconnect to the Bluetooth device.
You are now ready to make hands-free calls. Press the Uconnect “Phone” button on
your steering wheel to begin.
Uconnect Device
Pairing Request
ELECTRONICS
152
NOTE:
Refer to UconnectPhone.com website for additional information on mobile phone pairing
and for a list of compatible phones.
Common Phone Commands (Examples)
• “Call John Smith”
• “Call John Smith mobile”
• “Dial 1 248 555 1212”
• “Redial”
Mute (Or Unmute) Microphone During Call
• During a call, press the “Mute” button on the Phone main screen to mute and unmute
the call.
Transfer Ongoing Call Between Handset And Vehicle
• During an on-going call, press the “Transfer” button on the Phone main screen to
transfer an on-going call between handset and vehicle.
Phonebook
The Uconnect system will automatically sync your phonebook from your paired phone, if
this feature is supported by your phone. Phonebook contacts are updated each time that
the phone is connected. If your phone book entries do not appear, check the settings on
your phone. Some phones require you to enable this feature manually.
• Your phonebook can be browsed on the Uconnect system touchscreen, but editing can
only be done on your phone. To browse, press the “Phone” button on the touchscreen,
then the “Phonebook” button on the touchscreen.
Favorite phonebook entries can be saved as Favorites for quicker access. Favorites are
shown at the top of the main phone screen.
Voice Command Tips
• Speaking complete names (i.e; Call John Doe vs. Call John) will result in greater system
accuracy.
• You can “link” commands together for faster results. Say “Call John Doe, mobile,” for
example.
• If you are listening to available voice command options, you do not have to listen to the
entire list. When you hear the command that you need, push the button on the
steering wheel, wait for the beep and say your command.
Changing The Volume
• Start a dialogue by pushing the Phone button , then say a command. For
example, "Help".
• Use the radio VOLUME/MUTE rotary knob to adjust the volume to a comfortable level
while the Uconnect system is speaking.
ELECTRONICS
153
NOTE:
The volume setting for Uconnect is different than the audio system.
NOTE:
To access help, push the Uconnect Phone button on the steering wheel and say
"help." Push the Uconnect Phone Pickup button or the VR button and say
"cancel" to cancel the help session.
Using Do Not Disturb
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications from incoming calls and texts, allowing
you to keep your eyes on the road and hands on the wheel. For your convenience there is
a counter display to keep track of your missed calls and text messages while you were
using Do Not Disturb.
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a text message, a call or both, when declining
an incoming call and send it to voicemail.
Automatic reply messages can be:
• “I am driving right now, I will get back to you shortly.”
• Create a custom auto reply message up to 160 characters.
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be selected so you can still place a second
call without being interrupted by incoming calls.
NOTE:
• Only the beginning of your custom message will be seen on the touchscreen.
• Reply with text message is not compatible with iPhones.
• Auto reply with text message is only available on phones that supporting Bluetooth
MAP.
Incoming Text Messages
After pairing your Uconnect system with a Bluetooth enabled mobile device with the
Message Access Profile (MAP), the Uconnect system can announce a new incoming text
message and read it to you over the vehicle’s audio system.
NOTE:
Only incoming text messages received during the current ignition cycle can be viewed/
read.
To enable incoming text messaging:
iPhone
1. Press the settings button on the mobile phone.
2. Select Bluetooth.
• Ensure Bluetooth is enabled, and the mobile phone is paired to the Uconnect
system.
ELECTRONICS
154
3. Select located under DEVICES next to Uconnect.
4. Turn “Show Notifications” to on.
Android Devices
1. Push the Menu button on the mobile
phone.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Connections.
4. Turn “Show Notifications” to on.
• A pop up will appear asking you to
accept a request for permission to
connect to your messages. Select
“Don’t ask again” and press OK.
NOTE:
All incoming text messages received during
the current ignition cycle will be deleted
from the Uconnect system when the igni-
tion is turned to the OFF position.
Helpful Tips And Common Questions To
Improve Bluetooth Performance With
Your Uconnect System
Mobile Phone won’t reconnect to system
after pairing:
• Set mobile phone to auto-connect or
trusted device in mobile phone
Bluetooth settings (Blackberry devices).
• Perform a factory reset on your mobile
phone. Refer to your mobile phone
manufacturer or cellular provider for in-
structions.
• Many mobile phones do not automatically reconnect after being restarted (hard
reboot). Your mobile phone can still be connected manually. Close all applications that
may be operating (refer to mobile phone manufacturer’s instructions), and follow
“Pairing (Wirelessly Connecting) Your Mobile Phone To The Uconnect System”.
Mobile Phone won’t pair to system:
• Perform a hard reset in the mobile phone by removing the battery (if removable — see
your mobile phone’s owner manual).
• Delete pairing history in mobile phone and Uconnect system; usually found in phone’s
Bluetooth connection settings.
Enable iPhone Incoming Text Messages
Enable Android Device Incoming Text Mes-
sages
ELECTRONICS
155
• Verify you are selecting “Uconnect” in the discovered Bluetooth devices on your mobile
phone.
• If your vehicle system generates a pin code the default is 0000.
Mobile Phonebook didn’t download:
• Check “Do not ask again,” then accept the “phonebook download” request on your
mobile phone.
• Up to 5,000 contact names with four numbers per contact will transfer to the
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV system phonebook.
• Up to 2,000 contact names with six numbers per contact will transfer to the Uconnect
5.0 system phonebook.
Can’t make a conference call:
• CDMA (Code-Division Multiple Access) carriers do not support conference calling.
Refer to your mobile phone user’s manual for further information.
Making calls while connected to AUX:
• Plugging in your mobile phone to AUX while connected to Bluetooth will disable
Hands-Free Calling. Do not make calls while your mobile phone is plugged into the AUX
jack.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
The steering wheel audio controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel.
Left Switch
• Push the switch up or down to search for
the next listenable station.
• Push the button in the center to select
the next preset station.
Right Switch
• Push the switch up or down to increase
or decrease the volume.
• Push the button in the center to change
modes AM/FM/SAT.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
The instrument cluster display features a driver interactive display that is located in the
instrument cluster. Pushing the controls on the left side of the steering wheel allows the
driver to select vehicle information and Personal Settings. Refer to “Programmable
Features” in this guide for further information.
Steering Wheel Audio Controls
ELECTRONICS
156
• Push the up arrow button to scroll
upward through the main menus
(Speedometer, Vehicle Info, Driver As-
sist, Fuel Economy, Trip, Audio, Mes-
sages, Screen Setup) and sub menus.
• Push the down arrow button to scroll
downward through the main menus and
sub menus.
• Push the right arrow button to scroll
forward to the next menu or sub menu.
• Push the left arrow button to scroll
back to a previous menu or sub menu.
• Push the OK button to access/select the
information screens, the submenu
screens of a main menu item, or to select
a personal setting in the setup menu. Push and hold the OK button for two seconds to
reset displayed/selected features that can be reset.
Compass Calibration
This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the need to set the compass manually.
When the vehicle is new, the compass may appear erratic, and the cluster will display
dashes (- -) until the compass is calibrated.
You may also calibrate the compass by completing one or more 360 degree turns (in an
area free from large metal or metallic objects) until the dashes (- -) displayed in the cluster
turn off. The compass will now function normally.
PERFORMANCE FEATURES
Overview Of Performance Features
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
The Performance Features include the following:
0-60 MPH (0-100 km/h) Timer
• Best
• Last
• Current
• Reaction Timer
Instrument Cluster Display Controls
ELECTRONICS
157
0-100 MPH (0-161 km/h) Timer
• Best
• Last
• Current
• Reaction Timer
1/8 Mile (200 meters) Timer
• Best
• Last
• Current
• Reaction Timer
1/4 Mile (400 meters) Timer
• Best
• Last
• Current
• Reaction Timer
Braking Distance
• Distance
• From Speed
Current G-Forces
Peak G-Forces
Lap Timer
Lap History
• Will list the last 5 laps with the best lap highlighted in green.
Top Speed
The following describes each feature and its operation:
0-60 MPH (0-100 km/h)
When selected, this screen displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go from 0 to
60 MPH (0 to 100 km/h) within 10 seconds.
• The feature will “ready” when the vehicle speed is at 0 MPH (0 km/h). The word
“READY” will flash when conditions are met for the event to begin.
• Dashes will display if the vehicle fails to reach 60 MPH (100 km/h) in less then
10 seconds.
• To clear the vehicle's best, last, and current 0-60 MPH (0-100 km/h) time, push and
hold the OK button for two seconds.
ELECTRONICS
158
0 to 100 MPH (0 to 161 km/h)
When selected, this screen displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go from 0 to
100 MPH (0 to 161 km/h) within 15 seconds.
• The feature will “ready” when the vehicle speed is at 0 MPH (0 km/h). The word
“READY” will flash when conditions are met for the event to begin.
• Dashes will display if the vehicle fails to reach 0 to 100 MPH (0 to 161 km/h) in less
then 15 seconds.
• To clear the vehicle's best, last and current 0 to 100 MPH (0 to 161 km/h) time, push
and hold the OK button for two seconds.
1/8 Mile (200 Meters)
When selected, this screen displays the time it takes the vehicle to travel 1/8 mile within
15 seconds and the vehicle's speed when it reaches 1/8 mile.
• The feature will “ready” when the vehicle is at 0 MPH (0 km/h). The word “READY” will
flash when conditions are met for the event to begin.
• Dashes will display if the vehicle fails to reach 1/8 mile (200 meters) in less then
15 seconds.
• To clear the vehicle's best 1/8 mile (200 meters) run, push and hold the OK button for
five seconds.
1/4 Mile (400 Meters)
When selected, this screen displays the time it takes the vehicle to travel 1/4 mile within
25 seconds and the vehicle's speed when it reaches 1/4 mile (400 meters).
• The feature will “ready” when the vehicle is at 0 MPH (0 km/h). The word “READY” will
flash when conditions are met for the event to begin.
• Dashes will display if the vehicle fails to reach 1/4 mile (400 meters) in less then
25 seconds.
• To clear the vehicle's best 1/4 mile (400 meters) run, push and hold the OK button for
two seconds.
Braking Distance
When selected, this screen displays the vehicle's braking distance, and the speed at which
the brake pedal was pushed.
• This feature will only function when applying the brakes at speeds above 30 MPH
(48 km/h).
• Engaging the parking brake will disable this feature.
• The word “READY” will display when conditions are met for the event to begin.
• The distance and speed measurements display while the event is taking place.
• The distance measurement will be aborted if the brake pedal is released before the
vehicle comes to a complete stop.
• Pushing and holding the OK button will clear the current and last run values.
ELECTRONICS
159
Current G-Force
When selected, this screen displays the current G-Force (lateral and longitudinal) that
displays the directions of the forces.
Peak G-Force
When selected, this screen displays all four G-Force values (two lateral and two longitu-
dinal).
• When a force greater than zero is measured, the display will update the value as it
climbs. As the G-Force falls, the peak forces will continue to display.
• Push and hold the OK button to clear the peak force values.
Lap Timer
When selected, the Lap Timer page will show the timer always at 0:00.00 with the
previous Best and Last time data (unless the driver has cleared it via hold to Reset).
• Pushing the OK button will start “current” timer from 0:00.0.
• When the OK button is pushed, the times are updated accordingly.
• As soon as the driver exits the Lap Timer pages, the “current” timer will stop and the
time will be reset to 0:00.00.
• If the driver stays on the Lap Timer pages, the “current” timer will reset to 0:00.0 when
ignition is placed in the off position, or ignition placed in the ON position (or will roll
over at 59:59.99 if ever possible).
• Each time the driver pushes the OK button for a Lap that current time populates, the
Last time and also populates the 1st (top) space on the Timer History page the current
time resets to 0:00.0 at every push of the OK button.
• The timer will stop when the driver navigates away from this page.
Lap History
When selected, this screen displays the Lap History, and will color highlight the time that
is the best time from the Timer Page.
• Each time the driver pushes the OK button (while on the Lap Timer page) the current
Lap Time populates the 1st spot and the rest of the data shifts down.
• Color will indicate the time that is the best time from the Timer Page.
• Holding the OK button only resets the page you are on.
• Lap History page is a static display of lap times only.
Top Speed
When selected, this screen displays the Top Speed since last reset:
• Populates a top speed from first drive cycle and every time that speed is exceeded that
number is stored here unless/until the driver resets the screen.
• Latching over ignition cycles.
ELECTRONICS
160
• Units will change with the global change in units.
PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES
Instrument Cluster Display
The instrument cluster display can be used to view or change the following settings. Push
the up arrow button or the down arrow button to scroll through the main menus,
then push the right arrow button to scroll through the submenus of each menu item.
Push the left arrow button to scroll back to a previous menu or sub menu. Push the OK
button to access/select the information screens or submenu screens of a main menu item.
Push and hold the OK button for two seconds to reset displayed/selected features that can
be reset.
• Speedometer • Audio
• Vehicle Info • Messages
• Driver Assist — If Equipped • Screen Setup
• Fuel Economy • Speed Warning — If Equipped
• Trip • Diagnostic — If Equipped
Uconnect Customer Programmable Features
The Uconnect system allows you to access Customer Programmable feature settings such
as Display, Units, Voice, Clock, Safety & Driving Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks,
Auto-On Comfort, Engine Off Options, Audio, Phone/Bluetooth, SiriusXM Setup, Restore
Settings, Clear Personal Data, System Information, and Compass Settings (5.0 Radio
Only) through buttons on the touchscreen.
NOTE:
If equipped with the Super Track Pak option please refer to the “Drive Mode Supplement”
within your Owners Information Kit for further descriptions of these modes.
• Press the “Controls” button located near the bottom of the touchscreen, then press the
“Settings” button on the touchscreen to access the Settings screen. When making a
selection, scroll up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted, then press and
release the preferred setting until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing
that setting has been selected. The following feature settings are available:
• Display • Engine Off Options
• Units • Audio
• Voice • Phone/Bluetooth
• Clock • SiriusXM Setup
• Safety & Driving Assistance • Restore Settings
• Lights • Clear Personal Data
• Doors & Locks • System Information
• Auto-On Comfort • Compass (5.0 Radio Only)
ELECTRONICS
161
Refer to “Uconnect Settings/Customer Programmable Features” found within “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” located in your Owner's Manual on the DVD for further
information.
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
Universal Garage Door Opener (HomeLink)
HomeLink replaces up to three hand-held transmitters that operate devices such as
garage door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security systems. The HomeLink
unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt battery.
The HomeLink buttons that are located in the overhead console or sunvisor designate the
three different HomeLink channels.
The HomeLink indicator is located above the center button.
Before You Begin Programming
HomeLink
Ensure that your vehicle is parked outside
of the garage before you begin program-
ming.
For efficient programming and accurate
transmission of the radio-frequency signal,
it is recommended that a new battery be
placed in the hand-held transmitter of the
device that is being programmed to the
HomeLink system.
To erase the channels, place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN position, then push and
hold the two outside HomeLink buttons (I and III) for up to 20 seconds or until the red
indicator flashes.
HomeLink Buttons
ELECTRONICS
162
NOTE:
Erasing all channels should only be performed when programming HomeLink for the first
time. Do not erase channels when programming additional buttons.
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or,
on the Internet at HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
Programming A Rolling Code
NOTE:
For programming Garage Door Openers that were manufactured after 1995. These Garage
Door Openers can be identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located where the
hanging antenna is attached to the Garage Door Opener. It is NOT the button that is
normally used to open and close the door. The name and color of the button may vary by
manufacturer.
1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink
button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to program while you push and hold the
hand-held transmitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator light. The HomeLink indicator
will flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink has received the frequency signal
from the hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons after the indicator light changes
from slow to rapid.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING”
button. This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the
garage door opener motor. Firmly push and release the “LEARN” or “TRAINING”
button.
NOTE:
You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the LEARN button has been
pushed.
6. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed HomeLink button twice (holding the
button for two seconds each time). If the device is plugged in and activates,
programming is complete.
NOTE:
If the device does not activate, push the button a third time (for two seconds) to complete
the training.
7. To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, repeat each step for each remaining
button. DO NOT erase the channels.
ELECTRONICS
163
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
NOTE:
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured before 1995.
1. Place the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink
button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to program while you push and hold the
hand-held transmitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator light. The HomeLink indicator
will flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink has received the frequency signal
from the hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons after the indicator light changes
from slow to rapid.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button and observe the indicator light. If
the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and the garage door
(or device) should activate when the HomeLink button is pushed.
6. To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons, repeat each step for each remaining
button. DO NOT erase the channels.
Using HomeLink
To operate, push and release the programmed HomeLink button. Activation will now occur
for the programmed device (e.g., garage door opener, gate operator, security system, entry
door lock, home/office lighting, etc.). The hand-held transmitter of the device may also be
used at any time.
WARNING!
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are programming the
universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people or pets are in the path
of the door or gate.
• Do not run your vehicle in a closed garage or confined area while programming the
transceiver. Exhaust gas from your vehicle contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is
odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous when inhaled and can cause
you and others to be severely injured or killed.
POWER OUTLET
ELECTRONICS
164
There are two 12 Volt electrical outlets on
this vehicle.
The front 12 Volt power outlet has power
available only when the ignition is placed in
the ACC or RUN position.
The center console outlet is powered di-
rectly from the battery (power available at
all times). Items plugged into this outlet
may discharge the battery and/or prevent
the engine from starting.
NOTE:
• Do not exceed the maximum power of
160 Watts (13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the
160 Watt (13 Amp) power rating is ex-
ceeded, the fuse protecting the system
will need to be replaced.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory
plugs only. Do not insert any other object
in the power outlet as this will damage
the outlet and blow the fuse. Improper
use of the power outlet can cause dam-
age not covered by your New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
Front Power Outlet
Center Console Power Outlet
Power Outlet Fuses
1 — #12 Fuse 20A Yellow Cigar Lighter Integrated Center Stack / Dual USB Charge
Only Ports
2 — #38 Fuse 20A Yellow Power Outlet Center Console / Media Hub
ELECTRONICS
165
UTILITY
166
TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS (MAXIMUM TRAILER WEIGHT RATINGS)
Engine/Transmission Frontal Area Max. GTW (Gross Trailer Wt.) Max. Tongue Wt. (See Note)
3.6L Automatic 22 sq ft (2.04 sq m) 1,000 lbs (453 kg) 100 lbs (45 kg)
5.7L Automatic 32 sq ft (2.97 sq m) 1,000 lbs (453 kg) 100 lbs (45 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds
Trailer towing with the 6.4L or 6.2L Supercharged engine is not recommended.
UTILITY
167
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Two-Wheel Drive And All-Wheel Drive
Recreational towing (with all four wheels on the ground, or using a tow dolly) is NOT
ALLOWED. The only acceptable method for towing this vehicle (behind another vehicle) is
on a vehicle trailer with all four wheels OFF the ground.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmis-
sion and/or transfer case damage. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
UTILITY
168
DRIVE MODES
Your SRT vehicle is equipped with a SRT Drive Mode feature. This feature gives the driver
control over the systems in the vehicle which affect its performance, enabling the driver
to tune it for desired driving scenarios. Below are the modes of operation:
NOTE:
Refer to “Drive Modes” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” in the Owner’s Manual
on the DVD for further descriptions of these modes.
Launch Mode — If Equipped
This vehicle is equipped with a Launch Control system that is designed to allow the driver
to achieve maximum vehicle acceleration in a straight line. Launch Control is a form of
traction control that manages tire slip while launching the vehicle. This feature is
intended for use during race events on a closed course where consistent quarter mile
(400m) and 0 to 60 (100km/h) times are desired. The system is not intended to
compensate for lack of driver experience or familiarity with the race track. Use of this
feature in low traction (cold, wet, gravel, etc.) conditions may results in excess wheel slip
outside this systems control resulting in an aborted launch.
NOTE:
Launch mode is not available within the first 500 miles (804 km) of engine break-in.
Preconditions:
• Launch control should not be used on public roads. Always check track conditions and
the surrounding area.
• Launch Control should only be used when the engine and transmission are at operating
temperature.
• Launch Control is intended to be used on dry, paved road surfaces only. Use on slippery
or loose surfaces may cause damage to vehicle components and is not recommended.
Launch Control is available when the following procedure is followed:
1. Push the LAUNCH button on the center stack switch bank.
NOTE:
Pushing the SRT button on the center stack or pressing the “Apps” button on the
touchscreen are two other options to access launch control features. Please refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” within your Owner’s
Manual on the DVD or the “Drive Modes Supplement” for further information.
2. Push the “Launch RPM Set-Up” button on the touchscreen. This screen will allow you
to adjust your launch RPM’s for optimum launch/traction.
3. Push the “Activate Launch Mode” button on the touchscreen.
4. Make sure the vehicle is not moving.
5. Make sure the steering wheel is pointing straight.
6. Hold the brake and make sure the vehicle is in “Drive” or “AutoStick” position.
SRT
169
7. While holding the brake, rapidly apply the accelerator pedal to wide open throttle. The
engine speed will hold at the RPM that was set in the “Launch RPM Set-up” screen.
NOTE:
Messages will appear in the instrument cluster to inform the driver if one or more of the
above conditions have not been met.
8. When conditions 4 through 7 have been met, the instrument cluster display will read
“Launch Ready Release Brake”.
9. Keep the vehicle pointed straight.
Launch control will be active until the vehicle reaches 62 mph (100 km/h), at which point
the ESC system will return to its current ESC mode.
Launch control will abort before launch completion, display “Launch Aborted” in the
cluster under any the following conditions:
• The accelerator pedal is released during launch. ESC system continues in ESC Full ON.
• The ESC system detects that the vehicle is no longer moving in a straight line.
• The “ESC OFF” button is pushed to change the system to another mode.
NOTE:
After launch control has been aborted, ESC will return to its current ESC mode.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to shift when the drive wheels are spinning and do not have traction.
Damage to the transmission may occur.
SRT PERFORMANCE FEATURES
SRT Instrument Cluster Display
SRT
170
The instrument cluster display can be used
to view or change the following SRT Perfor-
mance Features. Push the up or down
arrow button until SRT Performance
displays in the instrument cluster display,
then push the right arrow button. Follow
the prompts to view and set your desired
settings. Push the left arrow button to
scroll back to a previous menu or sub menu.
SRT Performance Sub Menu Items
•0-60 MPH (0-100 km/h) Timer •Current G-Force
•0-100 MPH (0–161 km/h) Timer •Peak G-Force
•1/8 Mile •Lap Timer
•1/4 Mile •Lap History
•Braking Distance •Top Speed
0-60 MPH (0-100 km/h)
• When selected, this screen displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go from 0 to
60 MPH (0 to 100 km/h) within 10 seconds.
0–100 MPH (0–161 km/h)
• When selected, this screen displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go from 0 to
100 MPH (0 to 161 km/h) within 20 seconds.
1/8 Mile, 1/4 Mile
• When selected, this screen displays the time it takes the vehicle to travel 1/8 mile (1/4
mile) within 30 seconds and the vehicle's speed when it reaches 1/8 mile (1/4 mile).
Braking Distance
• When selected, this screen displays the vehicle's braking distance and the speed at
which the brake pedal was depressed.
Current G-Force
• When selected, this screen displays the current G-Force (lateral and longitudinal) along
with a friction circle that displays the directions of the forces.
Peak G-Force
• When selected, this screen displays all four G-Force values (two lateral and two
longitudinal).
SRT Instrument Cluster Display Controls
SRT
171
Lap Timer
• When selected, the Lap Timer page will show the timer always at 0:00.00 with the
previous Best and Last time data (unless the driver has cleared it via hold to Reset)
Lap History
• When selected, this screen displays the Lap History, and will color highlight the time
that is the best time from the Timer Page.
Top Speed
• When selected, this screen displays the Top Speed since last reset.
UCONNECT PERFORMANCE PAGES
To access the Performance Pages, press the “Apps” button on the touchscreen then press
the “Performance Pages” button on the touchscreen.
The Performance Pages includes the following menus:
•Home •Gauges 2
•Timers •G – Force
•Gauges 1 •Engine
Home
When Home is selected, the following options will be available:
• A series of six images which can be selected by the user.
• A left and right arrow to allow the user to scroll through vehicle images.
• A short-cut to the Drive Modes feature.
Timers
When the Timers Page is selected you will be able to select from following “Tickets”:
Current
• Pressing the “Current” button displays a “real time” summary of performance timers.
Last
• Pressing the “Last” button displays the last recorded run of performance timers.
Best
• Pressing the “Best” button displays the best recorded run of performance timers,
except for braking data.
Save
• Pressing the “Save” button will let you save the last run. Any saved run over 10, will
overwrite the last saved run for Uconnect System storage.
SRT
172
Gauges 1
When selected, this screen displays the following values:
• Coolant Temperature
• Oil Pressure
• Oil Temperature
• Battery Voltage
• Trans Oil Temp
Gauges 2
When selected, this screen displays the following values for the 6.2L:
• Boost Pressure
• Air Fuel Ratio
• Inter-Cooler (I/C) Coolant Temperature
• Intake Air Temperature
When selected, this screen displays the following values for the 6.4L:
• Battery Voltage
• Intake Air Temperature
• Transmission Temperature
G-Force
When selected, this screen displays the following values:
• Lateral G-Force Left and Right
• Longitudinal G-Force Fore and Aft
• Peak G-Forces Fore Aft, Left and Right
• Vehicle Speed
• Steering Wheel Angle
Engine
When selected, this screen displays the following values:
• Vehicle Speed
• Instantaneous Horsepower/Kilowatts
• Instantaneous Torque
• Oil Pressure (6.4L Only)
• Gear
• Boost Pressure (6.2L Only)
SRT
173
SUMMER/THREE-SEASON TIRES
• This vehicle may be equipped with wheels and tires to enhance traction in both wet and
dry conditions.
• Summer tires are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice.
• Summer tires have significantly reduced grip in temperatures below 50°F (10°C).
• Use Summer tires only in sets of four.
NOTE:
Summer tires will not contain the all season designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on
the sidewall of the tire.
WARNING!
Do not use summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You could lose control, resulting in
severe injury or death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the possibility of loss
of vehicle control.
SRT
174
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Dial toll-free 1-800-521-2779 for U.S. Residents or 1-800-363-4869 for Canadian
Residents.
• Provide your name, vehicle identification number, license plate number, and your
location, including the telephone number from which you are calling.
• Briefly describe the nature of the problem and answer a few simple questions.
• You will be given the name of the service provider and an estimated time of arrival. If
you feel you are in an “unsafe situation”, please let us know. With your consent, we will
contact local police or safety authorities.
WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
IMPORTANT: The warning/indicator lights switch on in the instrument panel together with
a dedicated message and/or acoustic signal when applicable. These indications are
indicative and precautionary and as such must not be considered as exhaustive and/or
alternative to the information contained in the Owner’s Manual, which you are advised to
read carefully in all cases. Always refer to the information in this chapter in the event of
a failure indication.
All active telltales will display first, if applicable. The system check menu may appear
different based upon equipment options and current vehicle status.
This guide illustrates and describes the operation of warning and indicator telltales that
are either standard or optional based on the vehicle build. FCA reserves the right to make
changes in design and specifications and/or make additions to or improvements to its
products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products
previously manufactured.
Instrument Cluster Warning Lights
– Low Fuel Warning Light
This warning light indicates when the fuel level reaches approximately 1.5 gal (5.8 L).
This light will turn on and a single chime will sound.
– Battery Charge Warning Light
This light illuminates when the battery is not charging properly. If the battery charge
warning light remains on, it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the
charging system.
We recommend you do not continue driving if the battery charge warning light is on. Have
the vehicle serviced immediately.
– Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound when this light
turns on.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
175
We recommend you do not operate the vehicle or engine damage will occur. Have the
vehicle serviced immediately.
– Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS).
If the light is not on during startup, stays on, or turns on while driving we recommend you
contact the nearest authorized dealer and have the vehicle serviced immediately.
– Air Bag Warning Light
If the light is not on during startup, stays on, or turns on while driving have the vehicle
serviced by an authorized dealer immediately.
– Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Indicator Light
This light informs you of a problem with the system.
If a problem is detected, the light will come on while the engine is running. Cycle the
ignition when the vehicle has completely stopped and the gear selector is placed in the
PARK position; the light should turn off.
If the light remains lit with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be drivable.
However, see an authorized dealer immediately. If the light is flashing when the engine is
running, immediate service is required, and you may experience reduced performance, an
elevated/rough idle or engine stall, and your vehicle may require towing.
– Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Light
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size
than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires).
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more
of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to
the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
IF THE LIGHT SWITCHES ON AND A MESSAGE IS DISPLAYED INDICATING A LOW
TIRE PRESSURE, ADJUST THE AIR PRESSURE IN THE LOW TIRE TO THE AIR
PRESSURE SHOWN ON THE VEHICLE PLACARD OR TIRE INFLATION PRESSURE
LABEL LOCATED ON THE DRIVER'S DOOR.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
176
NOTE:
AFTER INFLATION, THE VEHICLE MAY NEED TO BE DRIVEN FOR 20 MINUTES
ABOVE 15 MPH (24 KM/H) BEFORE THE FLASHING LIGHT WILL TURN OFF.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the
driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with
the low tire pressure telltale.
When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one
minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction
indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or
alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
NOTE:
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature
change. Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in the
Winter. Example: If garage temperature is 68°F (20°C), and the outside temperature is
32°F (0°C), then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside temperature condition.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS
pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle.
Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement
equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can
cause sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can, or balance beads if your
vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
– Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condition.
If the light turns on or flashes continuously while driving, safely pull over and stop the
vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and
idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return to normal, turn the engine off
immediately.
We recommend that you do not operate the vehicle or engine damage will occur. Have the
vehicle serviced immediately.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
177
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or others could be badly burned by
steam or boiling coolant.
– Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light
The “ESC Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch
is turned to the ON/RUN position. It should go out with the engine running. If the “ESC
Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been
detected in the ESC system.
If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven
several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 MPH (48 km/h), we recommend you
drive to the nearest service center and have the vehicle serviced immediately.
– Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on, it may indicate that the parking brake is applied,
that the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the brake system master
cylinder reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is
at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic
system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)/Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case, the
light will remain on until the condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the
brake booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake, and a brake pedal
pulsation may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a
portion of the hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated
by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master
cylinder has dropped below a specified level. The light will remain on until the cause is
corrected.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) are also equipped with
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake
Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system
is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from
the OFF position to the ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for approximately
two seconds. The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake
fault is detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected by an authorized
dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the
ON/RUN position.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
178
NOTE:
This light shows only that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of
brake application. In the case of the brake pads of the vehicle were worn out, brake
warning light will be illuminated.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous. Part of the brake system may
have failed. It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a collision. Have the
vehicle checked immediately.
– Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
Certain conditions, such as a poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the MIL after engine
start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several typical driving
cycles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and not require towing.
If the MIL flashes when the engine is running, serious conditions may exist that could lead
to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage. We recommend you do
not operate the vehicle. Have the vehicle serviced immediately.
Instrument Cluster Indicator Lights
– Turn Signal Indicator
The arrows will flash with the exterior turn signals when the turn signal lever is operated.
A tone will chime, and an instrument cluster display message will appear if either turn
signal is left on for more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
179
NOTE:
If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check for a defective outside light bulb.
– High Beam Indicator
Indicates that headlights are on high beam.
– Front Fog Light Indicator
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on.
– Vehicle Security Light
This light will flash rapidly for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle security alarm
is arming. The light will flash at a slower speed continuously after the alarm is set. The
security light will also come on for about three seconds when the ignition is first turned on.
– Electronic Speed Control Set
Indicates that the Electronic Speed Control has been set.
– Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ON Indicator
If your vehicle is equipped with adaptive cruise control, the controls operate exactly the
same as the normal (fixed speed) cruise control with one difference. You can set a
specified distance you would like to maintain between you and the vehicle in front of you.
If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will apply limited braking or acceleration
automatically to maintain a preset following distance, while matching the speed of the
vehicle ahead.
If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you, ACC will maintain a fixed set speed.
Refer to “Speed Control” in “Operating Your Vehicle” for further information on Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) ON operation and proper use.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
180
NOTE:
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving convenience provided by cruise
control while traveling on highways and major roadways. However, it is not a safety system
and not designed to prevent collisions.
– Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light
The ESC Off mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use only and should not be used
on any public roadways. In this mode, all TCS and ESC stability features are turned OFF.
To enter the “Full Off” mode, push and hold the “ESC” switch for five seconds while the
vehicle is stopped with the engine running. After five seconds, a chime will sound, the
“ESC OFF” Indicator Light” will illuminate, and the "ESC OFF" message will display in the
vehicle cluster (left of the odometer). To turn ESC ON again, momentarily push the “ESC”
switch.
– Door Open Indicator
This indicator will illuminate when a door(s) is left open and not fully closed.
Oil Change Due
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system. The “Oil Change
Due” message will display for 5 seconds along with a single chime to indicate the next
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based,
which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal
driving style.
Resetting The Light After Servicing
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE START/STOP button and cycle the
ignition to the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Fully push the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times within 10 seconds.
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to
return the ignition to the OFF/LOCK position.
Vehicles Not Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Fully push the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE:
• If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle, the oil change indicator
system did not reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
• Resetting the oil life can also be done within the "Oil Life" menu under “Vehicle Info.”
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
181
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking
the appropriate action.
• On the highways — slow down.
• In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission in NEUTRAL, but do not
increase the engine idle speed.
NOTE:
There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition:
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C system adds heat to the engine
cooling system and turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat, the mode control to floor
and the blower control to high. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the
radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your
radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open the hood
until the radiator has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge
reads “H,” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner
turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on
the “H,” turn the engine off immediately and call for service.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
182
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull
far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or
changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the jack and
fall on you. You could be crushed. Never put any part of your body under a vehicle
that is on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing tires only. The jack should not
be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be jacked on a firm
level surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas.
Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage
The jack and spare tire are both stowed under an access cover in the trunk. Follow these
steps to access the jack and spare tire.
NOTE:
The spare tire must be removed in order to access the jack.
1. Open the trunk.
2. Lift the access cover using the pull strap.
3. Remove the fastener securing the spare tire.
Spare Tire/Tools Location
1 — Jack Beneath Spare Tire
2 — Spare Tire
3 — Pull Strap
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
183
4. Remove the spare tire.
5. Remove the fastener securing the jack.
6. Remove the wheel chocks, jack and lug
wrench assembly from under the spare
tire. Turn the jack screw to the left to
loosen the lug wrench, and remove the
wrench from the jack assembly.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the
occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places
provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced immediately.
Spare Tire Fastener
Jack Fastener
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
184
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible.
Avoid icy or slippery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic, pull
far enough off the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or changing the
wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Place the gear selector into PARK.
5. Turn off the ignition.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite of the jacking position
using the provided wheel chocks. For example, if changing the right front tire, chock
the left rear wheel. Place both chocks under the tire.
Wheel Chocks
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
185
NOTE:
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked.
Jacking And Changing A Tire
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage
to your vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible
before raising the vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Chock the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic transmission in PARK.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If you need to get under a raised
vehicle, take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire
change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are securely stowed, spares must be stowed
with the valve stem facing the ground.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicated
in the Jacking Instructions for this vehicle.
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, wheel chocks, and lug wrench.
NOTE:
The spare tire must be used for the rear wheel(s) only. For a flat front tire, move the rear
tire to the front and use the spare tire on the rear.
2. If equipped with aluminum wheels
where the center cap covers the lug
nuts, use the lug wrench to pry the
center cap off carefully before raising
the vehicle.
Warning Label
Spare Tire Label
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
186
3. Before raising the vehicle, use the lug wrench to loosen, but not remove, the lug nuts
on the wheel with the flat tire. Turn the lug nuts counterclockwise one turn while the
wheel is still on the ground.
4. Place the jack underneath the lift area that is closest to the flat tire. Turn the jack screw
clockwise to firmly engage the jack saddle with the lift area of the sill flange.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is too low for jack placement, slide the jack on its side and rotate it up into
position.
5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove
the flat tire and install the spare tire.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable. It could slip
off the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire.
6. Remove the lug nuts and tire.
Rear Jacking Location
Front Jacking Location
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
187
7. Mount the spare tire.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem facing outward. The vehicle could
be damaged if the spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
NOTE:
• For vehicles so equipped, do not at-
tempt to install a center cap or wheel
cover on the compact spare.
• Refer to “Compact Spare Tire” and to
“Limited-Use Spare” under “Tires—
General Information” in “Starting and
Operating” in your Owner's Manual on
the DVD for additional warnings, cau-
tions, and information about the spare
tire, its use, and operation.
8. Install the lug nuts with the cone shaped
end of the lug nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the lug nuts fully until
the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in personal
injury.
9. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.
10. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the wrench while at the end of the
handle for increased leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each nut has
been tightened twice. The correct tightness of each lug nut is 130 ft-lbs (176 N·m).
If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench by
your authorized dealer or service station.
NOTE:
For the SRT model the correct wheel nut tightness is 111 ft lbs (150 N·m).
11. Stow the wheel chocks, jack, tools and flat tire. Make sure the base of the jack faces
the front of the vehicle before tightening down the fastener.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the
occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places
provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced immediately.
Installing Compact Spare
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
188
Road Tire Installation
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel.
Lightly tighten the lug nuts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the lug nuts fully until
the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in personal
injury.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.
4. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle
for increased leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each nut has been
tightened twice. The correct tightness of each lug nut is 130 ft-lbs (176 N·m). If in
doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench by your
authorized dealer or service station.
NOTE:
For the SRT model the correct wheel nut tightness is 111 ft lbs (150 N·m).
5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a torque wrench to ensure that
all lug nuts are properly seated against the wheel.
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED
Description
Small punctures up to 1/4 inch (6 mm) in the tire tread can be sealed with Tire Service Kit.
Foreign objects (e.g., screws or nails) should not be removed from the tire. Tire Service Kit
can be used in outside temperatures down to approximately -4°F (-20°C).
This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you to drive your vehicle up to 100
miles (160 km) with a maximum speed of 55 mph (90 km/h).
Tire Service Kit Storage
The Tire Service Kit is located in the trunk.
Tire Service Kit Components And Operation
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
189
Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses
Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the
following symbols to indicate the air or seal-
ant mode.
•Selecting Air Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn
to this position for air pump operation only.
Use the Black Air Pump Hose (7) when
selecting this mode.
•Selecting Sealant Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn
to this position to inject the Tire Service Kit
Sealant and to inflate the tire. Use the
Sealant Hose (clear hose) (6) when select-
ing this mode.
•Using The Power Button
Push and release the Power Button (4) once
to turn on the Tire Service Kit. Push and
release the Power Button (4) again to turn
Off the Tire Service Kit.
•Using The Deflation Button
Push the Deflation Button (2) to reduce the
air pressure in the tire if it becomes over -
inflated.
Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions
• Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) prior to the
expiration date (printed at the lower right hand corner on the bottle label) to assure
optimum operation of the system. Refer to “Sealing a Tire with Tire Service Kit” section
(F) “Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement”.
• The Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) are a one tire application use and need to
be replaced after each use. Always replace these components immediately at your
original equipment vehicle dealer.
• When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid form, clean water, and a damp cloth will
remove the material from the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once the sealant
dries, it can easily be peeled off and properly discarded.
• For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem on the wheel is free of debris
before connecting the Tire Service Kit.
Tire Service Kit Components
1 — Sealant Bottle
2 — Deflation Button
3 — Pressure Gauge
4 — Power Button
5 — Mode Select Knob
6 — Sealant Hose (Clear)
7 — Air Pump Hose (Black)
8 — Power Plug (located on the bottom
side of the Tire Service Kit)
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
190
• You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to inflate bicycle tires. The kit also comes with
two needles, located in the Accessory Storage Compartment (on the bottom of the air
pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts, or similar inflatable items. However, use only the
Air Pump Hose (7) and make sure the Mode Select Knob (5) is in the Air Mode when
inflating such items to avoid injecting sealant into them. The Tire Service Kit Sealant
is only intended to seal punctures less than 1/4 inch (6 mm) diameter in the tread of
your tire.
• Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the hoses.
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far
enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when using the Tire Service Kit.
• Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle under the following circumstances:
• If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately 1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.
• If the tire has any sidewall damage.
• If the tire has any damage from driving with extremely low tire pressure.
• If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat tire.
• If the wheel has any damage.
• If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or the wheel.
• Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or heat source.
• A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the
occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in the place provided.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you,
your passengers, and others around you.
• Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service Kit to come in contact with hair,
eyes, or clothing. Tire Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled, swallowed, or
absorbed through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and respiratory irritation. Flush
immediately with plenty of water if there is any contact with eyes or skin. Change
clothing as soon as possible, if there is any contact with clothing.
• Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In case of an allergic reaction or rash,
consult a physician immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of reach of children. If
swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty of water and drink plenty of water.
Do not induce vomiting! Consult a physician immediately.
Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit
(A) Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s Hazard Warning flashers.
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the deflated tire) is in a position that is
near to the ground. This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hoses (6) and (7) to reach the
valve stem and keep the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground. This will provide the best
positioning of the kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated tire and running the
air pump. Move the vehicle as necessary to place the valve stem in this position before
proceeding.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
191
3. Place the transmission in PARK (auto transmission) or in Gear (manual transmission)
and place the ignition in the OFF position.
4. Set the parking brake.
(B) Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the Sealant Mode position.
2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) and then remove the cap from the fitting at the end of the
hose.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to the deflated tire.
4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw the fitting at the end of the
Sealant Hose (6) onto the valve stem.
5. Uncoil the Power Plug (8) and insert the plug into the vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
NOTE:
Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or nails) from the tire.
(C) Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The Deflated Tire:
• Always start the engine before turning on the Tire Service Kit.
NOTE:
Manual transmission vehicles must have the parking brake engaged and the gear selec-
tor in NEUTRAL.
• After pushing the Power Button (4), the sealant (white fluid) will flow from the Sealant
Bottle (1) through the Sealant Hose (6) and into the tire.
NOTE:
Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the tire.
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within0–10seconds through the Sealant Hose
(6):
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn off the Tire Service Kit. Disconnect the Sealant Hose
(6) from the valve stem. Make sure the valve stem is free of debris. Reconnect the
Sealant Hose (6) to the valve stem. Check that the Mode Select Knob (5) is in the
Sealant Mode position and not Air Mode. Push the Power Button (4) to turn on the Tire
Service Kit.
2. Connect the Power Plug (8) to a different 12 Volt power outlet in your vehicle or
another vehicle, if available. Make sure the engine is running before turning on the Tire
Service Kit.
3. The Sealant Bottle (1) may be empty due to previous use. Call for assistance.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
192
NOTE:
If the Mode Select Knob (5) is on Air Mode and the pump is operating, air will dispense
from the Air Pump Hose (7) only, not the Sealant Hose (6).
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the Sealant Hose (6):
1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no longer flowing through hose (typically
takes 30 - 70 seconds). As the sealant flows through the Sealant Hose (6), the
Pressure Gauge (3) can read as high as 70 psi (4.8 Bar). The Pressure Gauge (3) will
decrease quickly from approximately 70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the actual tire pressure when
the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty.
2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire immediately after the Sealant Bottle (1)
is empty. Continue to operate the pump and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated
on the tire pressure label on the driver-side latch pillar (recommended pressure).
Check the tire pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge (3).
If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
• The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive the vehicle further. Call for
assistance.
NOTE:
If the tire becomes overinflated, push the Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure to
the recommended inflation pressure before continuing.
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure
within 15 minutes:
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn off the Tire Service Kit.
2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the Sealant Bottle (1) and place the
sticker on the instrument panel.
3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the valve stem, reinstall the cap on
the fitting at the end of the hose, and place the Tire Service Kit in the vehicle storage
location. Quickly proceed to (D) “Drive Vehicle.”
CAUTION!
• The metal end fitting from Power Plug (8) may get hot after use, so it should be
handled carefully.
• Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) can result
in sealant contacting your skin, clothing, and the vehicle’s interior. It can also result
in sealant contacting internal Tire Service Kit components which may cause perma-
nent damage to the kit.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
193
(D) Drive Vehicle:
Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire, drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km)
or 10 minutes to ensure distribution of the Tire Service Kit Sealant within the tire. Do not
exceed 55 mph (90 km/h).
WARNING!
Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair. Have the tire inspected and repaired
or replaced after using Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h) until the tire
is repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this warning can result in injuries that are
serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
(E) After Driving:
Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “Whenever You Stop to Use Tire Service Kit” before
continuing.
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the Air Mode position.
2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the vehicle's 12 Volt power outlet.
3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (7) (black in color) and screw the fitting at the end of hose
(7) onto the valve stem.
4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure Gauge (3).
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar):
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive the vehicle further. Call for
assistance.
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn on Tire Service Kit and inflate the tire to the pressure
indicated on the tire and loading information label on the driver-side door opening.
NOTE:
If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure to
the recommended inflation pressure before continuing.
2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve stem, reinstall the cap on the valve stem
and unplug from 12 Volt outlet.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage area in the vehicle.
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the earliest opportunity at an
authorized dealer or tire service center.
5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the instrument panel after the tire has been
repaired.
6. Replace the Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) assembly at your authorized
dealer as soon as possible. Refer to (F) “Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement”.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
194
NOTE:
When having the tire serviced, advise the authorized dealer or service center that the tire
has been sealed using the Tire Service Kit.
(F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement:
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) (clear in color).
2. Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the recessed area under the sealant
bottle.
3. Push the Sealant Bottle release button. The Sealant Bottle (1) will pop up. Remove the
bottle and dispose of it accordingly.
4. Clean any remaining sealant from the Tire Service Kit housing.
5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (1) in the housing so that the Sealant Hose (6) aligns
with the hose slot in the front of the housing. Push the bottle into the housing. An
audible click will be heard indicating the bottle is locked into place.
6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) and
return the hose to its storage area (located on the bottom of the air pump).
7. Return the Tire Service Kit to its storage location in the vehicle.
BATTERY LOCATION
The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk. Remote battery posts are located
on the right side of the engine compartment for jump-starting.
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be jump-started using a set of jumper
cables and a battery in another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack.
Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly so please follow the procedures in this
section carefully.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack follow the manufacturer’s operating instruc-
tions and precautions.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen. It could rupture or explode and
cause personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system
voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor, alternator or
electrical system may occur.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
195
Preparations For Jump-Start
The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk. Remote battery posts are located
on the right side of the engine compartment for jump-starting.
NOTE:
The remote battery posts are viewed by standing on the right side of the vehicle looking
over the fender.
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start
anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or bracelets that might make an
inadvertent electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen
gas which is flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or sparks away from the
battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission into PARK and place the
ignition in the OFF position.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.
3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park the vehicle within the jumper
cables reach, set the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
Remote Battery Posts
1 — Positive Battery Post
2 — Negative Battery Post
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
196
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection
and personal injury could result.
Jump-Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could result in personal injury or property
damage due to battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in damage to the charging system of the
booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the remote positive (+) post of the
vehicle with the discharged battery.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the
booster battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to the negative (-) post of the booster
battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper cable to the remote negative (-)
post of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post of the discharged battery. The
resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury. Only use the specific ground point, do not use any other exposed metal
parts.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery, let the engine idle a few
minutes, and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in the reverse sequence:
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable from the remote negative (-) post
of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper cable from the negative (-) post
of the booster battery.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
197
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the
booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper cable from the remote positive
(+) post of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle you should have the battery and
charging system inspected at your authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw power from the vehicle’s
battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long
enough without engine operation, the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to
degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
MANUAL PARK RELEASE—8SPEEDTRANSMISSION
WARNING!
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the parking brake, before activating the
Manual Park Release. Activating the Manual Park Release will allow your vehicle to roll
away if it is not secured by the parking brake or by proper connection to a tow vehicle.
Activating the Manual Park Release on an unsecured vehicle could lead to serious
injury or death for those in or around the vehicle.
In order to move the vehicle in cases where the transmission will not shift out of PARK
(such as a dead battery), a Manual Park Release is available.
Follow these steps to use the Manual Park Release:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Remove the console storage bin.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
198
3. Remove the plastic cover under the bin
by using the slot provided to access the
Manual Park Release lever.
4. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool,
fish the tether strap up through the
opening in the console base.
5. Insert the screwdriver into the slot in the
center of the lever, and disengage the
lever locking tab by pushing it to the
right.
6. While holding the locking tab in the
disengaged position, pull the tether
strap to rotate the lever up and rearward,
until it locks in place in the vertical
position. The vehicle is now out of PARK
and can be moved. Release the parking
brake only when the vehicle is securely
connected to a tow vehicle.
To Reset The Manual Park Release:
1. Push the latch (at the base of the lever,
on the rear side) rearward (away from the
lever) to unlatch the lever.
2. Rotate the Manual Park Release lever
forward and down, to its original posi-
tion, until the locking tab snaps into
place to secure the lever.
3. Pull up gently on the tether strap to
confirm that the lever is locked in its
stowed position.
4. Tuck the tether strap into the base of the
console. Reinstall the Manual Park Re-
lease cover and the console storage bin.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial
towing service.
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The
Ground RWD MODELS AWD MODELS
Console Storage Bin
Manual Park Release
1 — Tether Strap
2 — Locking Tab
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
199
Flat Tow NONE
If transmission is
operable:
• Transmission in
NEUTRAL
• 30 mph (48 km/h)
max speed
• 30 miles (48 km)
max distance
NOT ALLOWED
Wheel Lift Or Dolly
Tow
Front
NOT RECOMMENDED
(but, if used, same
limitations as above)
NOT ALLOWED
Rear NOT RECOM-
MENDED
NOT RECOM-
MENDED, but, if
used:
• Ignition in ON/
RUN position
• Transmission in
NEUTRAL (NOT in
Park)
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD BEST METHOD
Refer to your Owner’s Manual on the DVD for further information.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it can often be moved using a rocking
motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels.
Push and hold the lock button on the gear selector. Then, shift back and forth between
DRIVE and REVERSE while gently pressing the accelerator. Use the least amount of
accelerator pedal pressure that will maintain the rocking motion, without spinning the
wheels or racing the engine.
NOTE:
Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph
(8 km/h) or less. Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL for more than
2 seconds, you must press the brake pedal to engage DRIVE or REVERSE.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to transmission overheating and
failure. Allow the engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at least one
minute after every five rocking-motion cycles. This will minimize overheating and
reduce the risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
200
NOTE:
Push the "ESC Off" switch, to place the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system in
"Partial Off" mode, before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control” in
“Starting And Operating” in the Owner’s Manual on the DVD for further information. Once
the vehicle has been freed, push the "ESC Off" switch again to restore "ESC On" mode.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause damage, or even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could explode and injure
someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer
than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
CAUTION!
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not
spin the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission
overheating and failure. It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels above
30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring).
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM (EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident Response System.
Please refer to “Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags” in “Occupant
Restraints” for further information on the Enhanced Accident Response System (EARS)
function.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR
is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment
or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed.
Please refer to “Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags” in “Occupant
Restraints” for further information on the Event Data Recorder (EDR).
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
201
OPENING THE HOOD
1. Pull the hood release lever located on
the instrument panel, below the head-
light switch.
2. Raise the hood and locate the safety
catch lever, in the middle of the hood
opening.
3. Push the safety catch lever to the left
while lifting the hood at the same time.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully
latched, it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision. Failure to
follow this warning could result in serious injury or death.
Hood Release
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
202
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
203
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L
1. Remote Jump Start Positive Terminal
2. Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
3. Remote Jump Start Negative Terminal
4. Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover
5. Engine Oil Fill
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
204
6. Engine Coolant Reservoir Pressure Cap
7. Air Cleaner Filter
8. Engine Oil Dipstick
9. Washer Fluid Reservoir
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
205
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 5.7L
1. Remote Jump Start Positive Terminal
2. Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
3. Remote Jump Start Negative Terminal
4. Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover
5. Engine Oil Fill
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
206
6. Engine Coolant Reservoir Pressure Cap
7. Air Cleaner Filter
8. Engine Oil Dipstick
9. Washer Fluid Reservoir
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
207
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 6.2L SUPERCHARGED
1. Remote Jump Start Positive Terminal
2. Intercooler Coolant Reservoir Pressure Cap
3. Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
4. Engine Oil Fill
5. Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
208
6. Engine Coolant Reservoir Pressure Cap
7. Air Filter Cleaner
8. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
9. Remote Jump Start Negative Terminal
10. Engine Oil Dipstick
11. Washer Fluid Reservoir
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
209
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 6.4L
1. Remote Jump Start Positive Terminal
2. Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
3. Remote Jump Start Negative Terminal
4. Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover
5. Engine Oil Fill
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
210
6. Engine Coolant Reservoir Pressure Cap
7. Air Cleaner Filter
8. Engine Oil Dipstick
9. Washer Fluid Reservoir
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
211
FLUID CAPACITIES — NON-SRT
Fluid Capacities — 3.6L
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol or up to 85% Ethanol for
Flex Fuel (E-85) Engine 18.5 Gallons 69.9 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
SAE 5W-20, API Certified 6 Quarts 5.6 Liters
Cooling System*
MOPAR Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/
150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent 10 Quarts 9.5 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
Fluid Capacities — 5.7L
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
89 Octane Recommended – 87 Octane Acceptable,
0-15% Ethanol 18.5 Gallons 69.9 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
SAE 5W-20, API Certified 7 Quarts 6.6 Liters
Cooling System*
MOPAR Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/
150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent – without Severe
Duty II Cooling System
14.5 Quarts 13.9 Liters
MOPAR Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/
150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent – with Severe
Duty II Cooling System
15 Quarts 14.3 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
FLUID CAPACITIES — SRT
Fluid Capacities — SRT 6.2L
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
91 Octane or higher, 0-15% Ethanol 18.5 Gallons 70 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
SAE 0W-40, Synthetic API Certified 7 Quarts 6.6 Liters
Cooling System *
Engine: MOPAR Antifreeze/Engine Coolant (OAT cool-
ant conforming to MS.90032) 10 Year/150,000 Mile
Formula or equivalent
15.2 Quarts 14.4 Liters
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
212
U.S. Metric
Intercooler: MOPAR Antifreeze/Engine Coolant (OAT
coolant conforming to MS.90032) 10 Year/
150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent
5 Quarts 4.7 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
Fluid Capacities — SRT 6.4L
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
91 Octane or higher, 0-15% Ethanol 18.5 Gallons 70 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
SAE 0W-40, Synthetic API Certified 7 Quarts 6.6 Liters
Cooling System *
MOPAR Antifreeze/Engine Coolant (OAT coolant con-
forming to MS.90032) 10 Year/150,000 Mile For-
mula or equivalent
15.2 Quarts 14.4 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS — NON-SRT
Important Information
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive Technol-
ogy (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may
decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is
different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT)
engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a
non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system in an
emergency, the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with
fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not
use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be compatible
with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not
recommended.
Engine — 3.6L
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
213
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze/
Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT
(Organic Additive Technology).
Engine Oil
We recommend you use API Certified SAE
5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the require-
ments of FCA Material Standard MS-
6395 such as MOPAR, Pennzoil, and Shell
Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for
correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use a MOPAR Engine
Oil Filter.
Spark Plugs We recommend you use MOPAR Spark
Plugs.
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine 87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol.
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Flex Fuel (E-85) En-
gine 87 Octane, Up to 85% Ethanol.
Engine — 5.7L
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze/
Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT
(Organic Additive Technology).
Engine Oil
We recommend you use API Certified SAE
5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the require-
ments of FCA Material Standard MS-
6395 such as MOPAR, Pennzoil, and Shell
Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for
correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use a MOPAR Engine
Oil Filter.
Spark Plugs We recommend you use MOPAR Spark
Plugs.
Fuel Selection – 5.7L Engine 89 Octane Recommended – 87 Octane Ac-
ceptable, 0-15% Ethanol.
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, Or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission — 8-Speed Trans-
mission
Use only MOPAR ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Auto-
matic Transmission Fluid, or equivalent.
Failure to use the correct fluid may affect
the function or performance of your trans-
mission.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
214
Component Fluid, Lubricant, Or Genuine Part
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use MOPAR DOT 3 and
SAE J1703. If DOT 3 brake fluid is not
available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.
Front Axle We recommend you use MOPAR Synthetic
Gear Lubricant SAE 75W90 (API GL-5).
Rear Axle We recommend you use MOPAR OD Syn-
thetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W85 (API GL-
5).
Transfer Case We recommend you use MOPAR Transfer
Case Lubricant for BorgWarner 44–40.
SRT FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS
Important Information
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive Technol-
ogy (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may
decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is
different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT)
engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a
non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system in an
emergency, the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with
fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not
use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be compatible
with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not
recommended.
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine/Intercooler Coolant We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/
150,000 Mile Formula OAT coolant conforming to
MS.90032.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
215
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Oil For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only recom-
mends full synthetic engine oils.
The manufacturer recommends the use of Pennzoil Ultra
0W-40 or equivalent MOPAR engine oil meeting the re-
quirements of FCA Material Standard MS-12633 for use in
all operating temperatures.
Engine Oil Filter MOPAR Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.
Spark Plugs We recommend you use MOPAR Spark Plugs.
Fuel Selection 91 Octane or higher, 0-15% Ethanol.
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission Use only MOPAR ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Auto-
matic Transmission Fluid, or equivalent. Fail-
ure to use the correct fluid may affect the
function or performance of your transmission.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use MOPAR DOT 3 brake
fluid. If DOT 3 brake fluid is not available,
then DOT 4 is acceptable.
Hydraulic Power Steering Reservoir — If
Equipped
We recommend you use MOPAR Hydraulic
System Power Steering Fluid or equivalent
meeting the requirements of FCA Material
Standard MS-10838.
Rear Axle We recommend you use MOPAR LSD Syn-
thetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W85 (API GL-
5).
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
For information on the maintenance procedures for your vehicle, please refer to “Main-
tenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” in your Owner’s Manual or applicable
supplement on the DVD for further details.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE — NON-SRT
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change indicator system. The oil change
indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled
maintenance.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
216
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change indicator message will illuminate.
This means that service is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions such as frequent
short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage
will influence when the “Change Oil” or “Oil Change Required” message is displayed.
Severe Operating Conditions can cause the change oil message to illuminate as early as
3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible,
within the next 500 miles (805 km).
The “Oil Change Required” message will be displayed in the instrument cluster and a
single chime will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the
scheduled oil change. If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your
authorized dealer, the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under
“Instrument Cluster Warning Lights” in “What To Do In Emergencies” in this guide or
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” in your Owner’s
Manual on the DVD for further information.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km),
twelve months or 350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350 hours of
engine run or idle time is generally only a concern for fleet customers.
Severe Duty All Models
Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle is operated in a dusty and
off-road environment, or is operated predominantly at idle or only very low engine RPM’s.
This type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
• Check engine oil level.
• Check windshield washer fluid level.
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage. Rotate tires at the first sign
of irregular wear, even if it occurs before your next scheduled service.
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake master cylinder, and power
steering (if equipped) and fill as needed.
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
Maintenance Chart
Required Maintenance Intervals:
Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following page for the required maintenance
intervals.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
•Change oil and filter
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
217
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
•Rotate the tires
Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before your next scheduled
service
•Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required
•Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and park brake
•Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses
•Inspect exhaust system
•Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off-road conditions
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
218
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV joints. X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, boot seals, and replace if
necessary. XXX X X X X
Inspect the rear axle fluid. Inspect the front axle fluid (All Wheel
Drive Only). XXX X X X X
Inspect the brake linings, replace as necessary. X X X X X X X
Adjust park brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc
brakes. XXX X X X X
Inspect transfer case fluid (All Wheel Drive Only). X X X
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air filter. X X X X X
Replace cabin/air conditioning filter. X X X X X X X
Replace spark plugs. ** X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or
150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes first. XX
Inspect the transfer case fluid. Change the transfer case fluid; if
using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, off-
road, or frequent trailer towing. (All Wheel Drive Only).
XX
Change the rear axle fluid and on models equipped with All Wheel
Drive (AWD) change the front axle fluid if using your vehicle for any
of the following: police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or frequent trailer tow-
ing.
XX X
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
219
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. X
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply.
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right
equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and
performance. This could cause an accident.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
220
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
221
MAINTENANCE RECORD
Odometer Date Signature, Authorized Service Center
20,000 Miles
(32,000 km) or
2 Years
30,000 Miles
(48,000 km) or
3 Years
40,000 Miles
(64,000 km) or
4 Years
50,000 Miles
(80,000 km) or
5 Years
60,000 Miles
(96,000 km) or
6 Years
70,000 Miles
(112,000 km) or
7 Years
80,000 Miles
(128,000 km) or
8 Years
90,000 Miles
(144,000 km) or
9 Years
100,000 Miles
(160,000 km) or
10 Years
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
222
110,000 Miles
(176,000 km) or
11 Years
120,000 Miles
(192,000 km) or
12 Years
130,000 Miles
(208,000 km) or
13 Years
140,000 Miles
(224,000 km) or
14 Years
150,000 Miles
(240,000 km) or
15 Years
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
223
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE — SRT
The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in this manual must be done at the times or
mileages specified to protect your vehicle warranty and ensure the best vehicle perfor-
mance and reliability. More frequent maintenance may be needed for vehicles in severe
operating conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip driving. Inspection and
service should also be done anytime a malfunction is suspected.
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
A “Oil Change Required” message will be displayed in the instrument cluster and a single
chime will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change indicator message will illuminate.
This means that service is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as
possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
NOTE:
• The oil change indicator message will not monitor the time since the last oil change.
Change your vehicle's oil if it has been six months since your last oil change, even if the
oil change indicator message is NOT illuminated.
• Change your engine oil more often if you drive your vehicle off-road/track usage for an
extended period of time.
• Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6,000 miles (10,000 km)
or six months, whichever comes first.
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the
scheduled oil change. If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your
authorized dealer, the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under
“Instrument Cluster Warning Lights” in “What To Do In Emergencies” in this guide or
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” in your Owner’s
Manual on the DVD for further information.
At Each Stop For Fuel
• Check the engine oil level. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures/Engine Oil” in “Main-
taining Your Vehicle” for further information.
• Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required.
Once A Month
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage.
• Inspect the battery, and clean and tighten the terminals as required.
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake master cylinder, and power steering
(6.2L Only), and add as needed.
• Check all lights and other electrical items for correct operation.
At Each Oil Change
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
224
• Change the engine oil filter.
• Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the vehicle.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
225
SRT — Maintenance Chart
Miles:
6,000
12,000
18,000
24,000
30,000
36,000
42,000
48,000
54,000
60,000
66,000
72,000
78,000
84,000
90,000
96,000
102,000
108,000
114,000
120,000
126,000
132,000
138,000
144,000
150,000
Or Months: 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150
Or Kilometers:
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
160,000
170,000
180,000
190,000
200,000
210,000
220,000
230,000
240,000
250,000
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. X X XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular
wear, even if it occurs before scheduled mainte-
nance.
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
If using your vehicle for any of the following:
dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the engine
air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
XXXXXXXXXXXX
Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary. X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect the CV joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect the exhaust system. X X X X X X X X X X X X
Adjust the parking brake on vehicles equipped
with four wheel disc brakes. XXXXX
Change the rear axle fluid if using your vehicle for
any of the following: police, taxi, fleet or frequent
trailer towing.
XXX
Inspect the rear axle fluid. XXXXXXXX
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, and boot
seals, for cracks or leaks and all parts for dam-
age, wear, improper looseness or end play; re-
place if necessary.
XXXXXXXXXXXX
Replace the engine air cleaner filter. X X X X X
Replace the air conditioning filter. X X X X X X X X X X X X
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
226
Miles:
6,000
12,000
18,000
24,000
30,000
36,000
42,000
48,000
54,000
60,000
66,000
72,000
78,000
84,000
90,000
96,000
102,000
108,000
114,000
120,000
126,000
132,000
138,000
144,000
150,000
Or Months: 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150
Or Kilometers:
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
160,000
170,000
180,000
190,000
200,000
210,000
220,000
230,000
240,000
250,000
Inspect and replace the PCV Valve if necessary X
Replace the spark plugs – 6.2L Supercharged
Engine ** XX
Replace the spark plugs – 6.4L Engine ** X
Flush and replace the engine coolant/intercooler
at 120 months if not done at 150,000 miles
(240,000 km).
XX
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply.
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right
equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and
performance. This could cause an accident.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
227
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
228
SRT MAINTENANCE RECORD
Odometer Date Signature, Authorized Service Center
6,000 Miles
(10,000 km) or
6 Months
12,000 Miles
(20,000 km) or
12 Months
18,000 Miles
(30,000 km) or
18 Months
24,000 Miles
(40,000 km) or
24 Months
30,000 Miles
(50,000 km) or
30 Months
36,000 Miles
(60,000 km) or
36 Months
42,000 Miles
(70,000 km) or
42 Months
48,000 Miles
(80,000 km) or
48 Months
54,000 Miles
(90,000 km) or
54 Months
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
229
60,000 Miles
(100,000 km) or
60 Months
66,000 Miles
(110,000 km) or
66 Months
72,000 Miles
(120,000 km) or
72 Months
78,000 Miles
(130,000 km) or
78 Months
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
230
FUSES
WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appropriate replacement fuse with the
same amp rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another fuse of higher
amp rating. Never replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other material. Failure
to use proper fuses may result in serious personal injury, fire and/or property damage.
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition is off and that all the other
services are switched off and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an authorized dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air bag system, braking system),
power unit systems (engine system, gearbox system) or steering system blows,
contact an authorized dealer.
Front Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
The Front Power Distribution Center is located in the engine compartment. This module
contains fuses and relays. Fuse cavity location and descriptions are printed on the inside
of the power distribution center cover.
CAUTION!
• When installing the power distribution center cover, it is important to ensure the
cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow water to get
into the power distribution center and possibly result in an electrical system failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use only a fuse having the correct
amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a
dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it
indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
1 – – Fuse – Spare
2 40 Amp Green – Radiator Fan #1 – (Non 6.2L
Supercharged)
3 50 Amp Red – Electric Power Steering #1 – If
Equipped / Radiator Fan (6.2L
Supercharged) – If Equipped
4 30 Amp Pink – Starter
5 40 Amp Green – Electronic Stability Control
6 30 Amp Pink – Electronic Stability Control
7 20 Amp Blue – Police Ignition Run / ACC #1
8 20 Amp Blue – Police Ignition Run / ACC # 2
9 – 20 Amp Yellow All-Wheel Drive Module – If
Equipped
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
231
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
10 – 10 Amp Red Security – If Equipped / Under
Hood Lamp – Police
11 – 20 Amp Yellow Horns
12 – 10 Amp Red Air Conditioning Clutch
13 – – Fuse – Spare
14 – – Fuse – Spare
15 – 20 Amp Yellow Left HID – If Equipped
16 – 20 Amp Yellow Right HID – If Equipped
18 50 Amp Red – Radiator Fan #2 – (Non 6.2L
Supercharged)
19 50 Amp Red – Electric Power Steering #2 – If
Equipped / Radiator Fan (6.2L
Supercharged)
20 30 Amp Pink – Wiper Motor
21 30 Amp Pink
20 Amp Blue –
Police
– Headlamp Washers – If
Equipped
Police Bat Feed #2
22 40 Amp Green
/ 20 Amp Blue
– Police
– Engine Cooling Pump (6.2L
Supercharged) / Police Bat Feed
#3
23 20 Amp Blue – Police Bat Feed # 1
24 20 Amp Blue – Police Ignition Run/ACC Feed #
3
28 – – Fuse – Spare
29 – 15 Amp Blue Transmission Control Module
(Challenger/Charger Police) /
Electronic Shift Module (Chal-
lenger)
30 – – Fuse – Spare
31 – 25 Amp Clear Engine Module
32 – – Fuse – Spare
33 – – Fuse – Spare
34 – 25 Amp Clear Powertrain #1
35 – 20 Amp Yellow Powertrain #2
36 – 10 Amp Red Anti-Lock Brake Module
37 – 10 Amp Red Engine Controller / Rad Fan Re-
lays (Charger/300) / Electric
Power Steering Module
(Charger/300) / Fuel Pump Re-
lay (Charger/300) / 5–Speed
38 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
232
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
39 – 10 Amp Red EPS (Challenger) / EHPS
(Police)/AC Clutch Relay /
Vacuum Pump Relay / Fuel
Pump Relay (Challenger) / Rad
Fan Relays (Challenger)
48 – 10 Amp Red AWD Module/Front Axle Discon-
nect – If Equipped
49 – – Fuse – Spare
50 – – Fuse – Spare
51 – 20 Amp Yellow Vacuum Pump
52 – 5 Amp Tan Adaptive Cruise – If Equipped
53 – – Fuse – Spare
Rear Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
There is also a power distribution center located in the trunk under the spare tire access
panel. This center contains fuses and relays. Fuse cavity location and descriptions are
printed on the inside of the power distribution center cover.
CAUTION!
• When installing the power distribution center cover, it is important to ensure the
cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow water to get
into the power distribution center and possibly result in an electrical system failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use only a fuse having the correct
amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a
dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it
indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
2 60 Amp Yellow – Front PDC Feed #1
3 – – Fuse – Spare
4 60 Amp Yellow – Front PDC Feed #2
5
30 Amp Pink
20 Amp Blue – Po-
lice
– Sunroof/Dome Lamp
– Police
6 40 Amp Green – Exterior Lighting #1
7 40 Amp Green – Exterior Lighting #2
8 30 Amp Pink – Interior Lighting
9 40 Amp Green – Power Locks
10 30 Amp Pink – Driver Door Control
Module
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
233
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
11 30 Amp Pink – Passenger Door Con-
trol Module
12
– 20 Amp Yellow Dual USB Center
Console Rear/Cigar
Lighter IP – If
Equipped
15 40 Amp Green – HVAC Blower
16 20 Amp Blue – Left Spot Lamp –
Police
17 – – Fuse – Spare
18 30 Amp Pink – Mod Network Inter-
face – Police
19 – – Fuse – Spare
20 – – Fuse – Spare
21 30 Amp Pink – Fuel Pump
22 – 20 Amp Yellow –
Police
Right Spot Lamp –
Police
23 – 10 Amp Red Fuel Door/Diagnostic
Port
24 – 10 Amp Red Integrated Center
Stack
25 – 10 Amp Red Tire Pressure Moni-
tor
26
– 15 Amp Blue Cygnus Transmis-
sion Module
(Charger/300)/
Electronic Shift
Module (Charger/
300)
27 – 25 Amp Clear Amplifier – If
Equipped
31 – 25 Amp Breaker Power Seats – If
Equipped
32 – 15 Amp Blue HVAC Module/
Cluster
33
– 15 Amp Blue Ignition Switch/RF
Hub Module/
Steering Column
Lock (300) – If
Equipped
34 – 10 Amp Red Steering Column
Module/Clock (300)
35 – 5 Amp Tan Battery Sensor
36 – 15 Amp Blue Electronic Exhaust
Valve – If Equipped
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
234
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
37 – 20 Amp Yellow Radio
38
– 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet Inside
Arm Rest/Console
Media Hub
40 – – Fuse – Spare
41 – – Fuse – Spare
42 30 Amp Pink – Rear Defrost
43
– 20 Amp Yellow Comfort Seat And
Steering Wheel
Module (Heated
Steering Wheel/RR
Heated Seats)
44
– 10 Amp Red Park Assist / Blind
Spot / Rear View
Camera
45
– 15 Amp Blue Cluster / Rearview
Mirror / Compass
(Charger/300) / Hu-
midity Sensor
46 – – Fuse – Spare
47
– 10 Amp Red Adaptive Front
Lighting / Auto High
BEAM / Day Time
Running Lamps – If
Equipped
48 – 20 Amp Yellow Active Suspension –
(6.4L / 6.2L)
49 – – Fuse – Spare
50 – – Fuse – Spare
51 – 20 Amp Yellow Front Heated Seats
– If Equipped
52 – 10 Amp Red
Heated Cupholders/
Rear Heated Seat
Switches – If
Equipped
53 – 10 Amp Red
HVAC Module/In
Vehicle Temperature
Sensor
54 – – Fuse – Spare
55 – – Fuse – Spare
56 – – Fuse – Spare
57 – – Fuse – Spare
58 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module
59 – 20 Amp Yellow Adjustable Pedals –
Police
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
235
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
60 – – Fuse – Spare
61 – – Fuse – Spare
62 – – Fuse – Spare
63 – – Fuse – Spare
64 – 25 Amp Breaker Rear Windows
(Charger/300)
65 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module
66 – – Fuse – Spare
67 – 10 Amp Red
Rain and Light Sen-
sor / Sunroof / In-
side RR View Mirror
/ Power Outlet Illu-
mination (Center
Console) / Police
Run Acc Relay
68 – 10 Amp Red
Dual USB Power
Outlet – R/A Sense
(Charger/300) Rear
Sunshade (Charger/
300)
69 – – Fuse – Spare
70 – – Fuse – Spare
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
NOTE:
• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is
based on U.S. design standards.
P-Metric tires have the letter “P” molded
into the sidewall preceding the size des-
ignation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European — Metric tire sizing is based
on European design standards. Tires de-
signed to this standard have the tire size
molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter "P" is absent
from this tire size designation. Example:
215/65R15 96H.
1 — U.S. DOT
Safety Standards
Code (TIN)
4 — Maximum
Load
2 — Size Designa-
tion
5 — Maximum
Pressure
3 — Service De-
scription
6 — Treadwear,
Traction and Tem-
perature Grades
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
236
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards. The size
designation for LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the letters
“LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:
LT235/85R16.
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary emergency use only. Temporary high
pressure compact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into the sidewall
preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards and it begins with the tire
diameter molded into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/
80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P= Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
TorS= Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
– Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R= Construction code
– "R" means radial construction, or
– "D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
– A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H= Speed Symbol
– A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load
corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
– The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be
achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle
loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a
Standard Load (SL) tire:
•XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
•LL = Light load tire or
•C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a speci-
fied pressure
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
237
EXAMPLE:
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire in-
flation pressure for this tire
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only
be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code,
located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of
black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard
side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
– This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of
Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 01 means the year 2001
– Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to
represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could repre-
sent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the
body located behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pres-
sure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after
sitting for a minimum of three hours. Inflation pres-
sure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square
inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum
permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire.
The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the
sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation
Pressure
Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire infla-
tion pressure as shown on the tire placard.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
238
Term Definition
Tire Placard A label permanently attached to the vehicle describ-
ing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equip-
ment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire infla-
tion pressures.
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge
of the driver's side door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including the spare tire (if equipped), at least
monthly and inflate to the recommended pressure for your vehicle.
NOTE:
Refer to the Owner's Manual on the DVD or
the Tire Information Supplement located in
your Owner’s Information kit for more infor-
mation regarding tire warnings and
instructions.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
239
WARNING!
• Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect
vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the recom-
mended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause collisions. Under-inflation
increases tire flexing and can result in over-heating and tire failure. Over-inflation
reduces a tire’s ability to cushion shock. Objects on the road and chuck holes can
cause damage that results in tire failure. Unequal tire pressures can cause steering
problems. You could lose control of your vehicle. Over-inflated or under-inflated tires
can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle control.
Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information
about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in
the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front,
rear, and spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the
tire on your vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's load carrying capacity if you adhere to the
loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and
Loading Information placard in “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And Operating” section
of the Owner’s Manual on the DVD.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
240
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the
front and rear axles must not be exceeded. For further information on GAWRs, vehicle
loading, and trailer towing, refer to “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And Operating”
section of the Owner’s Manual on the DVD.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle, locate the statement “The
combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the
Tire and Loading Information placard. The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage
and trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg
or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will
be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and
luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on
the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg, and there will be five 68 kg passengers in
your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635-340
(5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load, cargo/
luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and
number and size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes only and may not
be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
241
• For the following example, the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never
exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle
handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended load
capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
SUMMER/THREE-SEASON TIRES
• This vehicle may be equipped with wheels and tires to enhance traction in both wet and
dry conditions.
• Summer tires are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice.
• Summer tires have significantly reduced grip in temperatures below 50°F (10°C).
• Use Summer tires only in sets of four.
NOTE:
Summer tires will not contain the all season designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on
the sidewall of the tire.
WARNING!
Do not use summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You could lose control, resulting in
severe injury or death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the possibility of loss
of vehicle control.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
242
Spare Tires — If Equipped
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead of a spare tire, please refer to the “Tire
Service Kit” section located in your Owner’s Information kit for further information.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take your vehicle through an
automatic car wash with a compact or limited-use temporary spare installed. Damage
to the vehicle may result.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel equivalent in look and function
to the original equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle. This
spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option,
refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only. You can identify if your vehicle
is equipped with a compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and
Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall
of the tire. Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” or “S” preceding the
size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
T,S=Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment tire should be repaired (or
replaced) and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare
wheel, since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire. Do not install
more than one compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for temporary emergency use only. With these
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare
tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which apply to your spare.
Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
243
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only. This tire may look like the
originally equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare tire
may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the
temporary use full size spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as your
original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire and reinstall on the
vehicle at the first opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use only. This tire is identified by a
label located on the limited use spare wheel. This label contains the driving limitations for
this spare. This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling.
Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use only. Installation of this limited use spare tire
affects vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the speed listed on the
limit use spare wheel. Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on your
Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear
edge of the driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original equipment tire at the first
opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of
vehicle control.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels, should be
cleaned regularly using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster and to
prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same soap solution recommended for the body of
the vehicle.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium
chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice or control dust
on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use
harsh chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s protective coating that
helps keep them from corroding and tarnishing.
NOTE:
Many aftermarket wheel cleaners contain strong acids or strong alkaline additives that can
harm the wheel surface.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
244
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or strong alkaline
additives or harsh brushes. These products and automatic car washes may damage the
wheel's protective finish. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Only car wash soap, MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including excessive brake dust, care must be taken
in the selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent damage
to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment, Mopar Chrome Cleaner, or their equivalent is
recommended. Select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or chrome
wheels. Do not use any products on Dark Vapor or Black Satin Chrome Wheels. They will
permanently damage this finish and such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner.
These products may damage the wheel's protective finish. Such damage is not covered
by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
NOTE:
If you intend on parking or storing your vehicle for an extended period after cleaning the
wheels with wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle for a few minutes before doing so. Driving the
vehicle and applying the brakes when stopping will reduce the risk of brake rotor
corrosion.
Dark Vapor Or Black Satin Chrome Wheels
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or Black Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE
wheel cleaners, abrasives or polishing compounds. They will permanently damage this
finish and such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE
ONLY MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this is
all that is required to maintain this finish.
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY
GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration. The specific grade rating assigned by the tire's manufacturer in
each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
245
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to
these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and one-half times as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their
use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades represent
the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have
poor traction performance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to
the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature
can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which
all passenger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either sepa-
rately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
FUEL DOOR RELEASE
The fuel door release button is located in the driver's door map pocket.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
246
• Push the button once and release to
open the fuel door.
Fuel Door Emergency Release
• To manually open the fuel door, remove
the cover and pull the release cable lo-
cated in the trunk.
Emergency Refueling
A funnel is provided (located in the trunk in
the spare tire area) to open the flapper door
to allow for emergency refueling with a gas
can.
Fuel Door Release Button
Fuel Door Emergency Release
Emergency Fuel Funnel
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
247
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the fuel door is open
or the tank is being filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is in violation of most state and
federal fire regulations and/or local bylaws, and will cause the MIL to turn on.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a
vehicle. You could be burned. Always place gas containers on the ground while
filling.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top off” the fuel tank after filling.
Materials Added To Fuel
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline contains a higher level
of detergents to further aide in minimizing engine and fuel system
deposits. When available, the usage of Top Tier Detergent gasoline
is recommended. Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should be
avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum and varnish
removal may contain active solvents or similar ingredients. These
can harm fuel system gasket and diaphragm materials.
FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) — IF EQUIPPED
E-85 General Information
The information in this section is unique for Flexible Fuel vehicles only. These vehicles
can be identified by a unique fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or Unleaded
Gasoline Only and a yellow fuel cap. Refer to the Owner’s Manual on the DVD for further
information.
CAUTION!
Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label or a yellow gas cap can operate on
E-85.
REPLACEMENT BULBS
All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass cartridge types. Aluminum base
bulbs are not approved and should not be used for replacement.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
248
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Rear Courtesy/Reading Lamps W5W
Rear Compartment (Trunk) Lamp 562
Overhead Console Reading Lamp 578
Visor Vanity Lamps A6220
Glove Compartment Lamp – If Equipped 194
Door Courtesy 562
Shift Indicator Lamp JKLE14140
Center High-Mount Stop Lamp (CHMSL) LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Optional Door Map Pocket/Cup Holder LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer for replacement instructions.
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Low/High Beam Headlamp (Standard Halo-
gen Bi Function Projector)
9005SL+
Low/High Beam Headlamp – High Intensity
Discharge (Premium HID Bi Function Pro-
jector)
D3S (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Front Park/Turn Lamp LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Front Fog Lamp – If Equipped LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Front Side Marker LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Rear Tail Lamp LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Rear Stop/Turn Lamp LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Rear Side Marker LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Backup Lamp LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
License LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
249
FCA US LLC CUSTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 21–8004 Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004 Phone: 1-800-423-6343
FCA CANADA INC. CUSTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 1621 Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone: 1-800-465-2001 (English) Phone:
1-800-387-9983 (French)
ASSISTANCE FOR THE HEARING IMPAIRED
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the manufacturer has installed special
TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer center. Any
hearing or speech impaired customer, who has access to a TDD or a conventional
teletypewriter (TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the manufacturer by
dialing 1-800-380-CHRY. Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY
teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain, or
emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or
other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
PUBLICATIONS ORDERING
• If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimen-
tary printed copy of the Owner's Manual, Navigation/Uconnect Manuals or Warranty
Booklet. United States customers may visit the Dodge Contact Us page at
www.dodge.com scroll to the bottom of the page and select the “Contact Us” link, then
select the “Owner’s Manual and Glove Compartment Material” from the left menu. You
may also obtain a complimentary copy by calling 1-800-423-6343 (U.S.) or
1-800-387-1143 (Canada).
• Replacement User Guide kits, DVDs, or, if you prefer, additional printed copies of the
Owner's Manual, Warranty Booklet, or Radio Manuals may be purchased by visiting
www.techauthority.com or by calling 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143
(Canada). Visa, Master Card, American Express and Discover orders are accepted. If
you prefer mailing your order, please call the above numbers for an order form.
NOTE:
• A street address is required when ordering manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
250
• The Owner's Manual and User Guide electronic files are also available on the Chrysler,
Jeep
®
, Ram Truck, Dodge and SRT websites.
• Click on the “For Owners” tab, select “Owner/Service Manuals”, then select your
desired model year and vehicle from the drop down lists.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS IN THE UNITED STATES
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or
death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your
authorized dealer or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator,
NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can
also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you should contact the Customer
Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect
to the Canadian government should contact Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect
Investigations and Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/.
French Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian govern-
ment should contact Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls
at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/securiteroutiere/.
CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
251
AUTHENTIC ACCESSORIES BY MOPAR
• The following highlights just some of the many Authentic Dodge Accessories by Mopar
featuring a fit, finish, and functionality specifically for your Dodge Charger.
• In choosing Authentic Accessories you gain far more than expressive style, premium
protection, or extreme entertainment, you also benefit from enhancing your vehicle
with accessories that have been thoroughly tested and factory-approved.
• For the full line of Authentic Dodge Accessories by Mopar, visit your local dealership or
online at mopar.com for U.S. residents and mopar.ca for Canadian residents.
NOTE:
All parts are subject to availability.
EXTERIOR:
• Rear Spoiler • Custom Wheels • Fog Lights
• Trailer Hitch Receiver And
Wire Harness
• Graphics Packages • Molded Splash Guards
INTERIOR:
• Premium Carpet Floor Mats • Slush Mats • Bright Pedal Kit
• Door Sill Guards • Premium Carpet Cargo Mat • Katzkin Leather Interiors
ELECTRONICS:
• Kicker Sound System • Uconnect Phone • Remote Start
• Electronic Vehicle Tracking
System (EVTS)
• Mopar Connect
PERFORMANCE
• Cold Air Intake • Cat Back Exhaust • Strut Tower Braces
• Scat Pack Performance
Packages
• Performance Suspension • Anti Sway Bars
• Kicker is a registered trademark of Stillwater Designs and Audio, Inc.
MOPAR® ACCESSORIES
252
FAQ’s
GETTING STARTED
How do I install my LATCH Equipped Child Seat? pg. 44
How do I program my Front Seat Memory? pg. 52
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE
How does the Automatic Climate Control operate? pg. 89
ELECTRONICS
How do I know which radio I have?
• Uconnect 5.0 pg. 107
• Uconnect 8.4, 8.4 NAV pg. 117
How do I select the AUX music source? pg. 123
How do I set the clock on my radio?
• Uconnect 5.0 pg. 108
• Uconnect 8.4, 8.4 NAV pg. 117
How do I use the Navigation feature? pg. 131
How do I pair my cell phone via Bluetooth with the Uconnect Hands-Free Voice Activation
System? pg. 150
How do I configure my Universal Garage Door Opener (HomeLink)? pg. 162
How do I improve the Bluetooth performance of my Uconnect System? pg. 155
UTILITY
How do I know how much I can tow with my vehicler? pg. 167
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
What do I do if my TPMS warning light is blinking? pg. 176
How do I change a flat tire? pg. 183
How do I Jump-Start my vehicle? pg. 195
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Where is my Fuse Block located? pg. 231
What type of oil do I use in my 3.6L or 5.7L engine? pg. 213
What type of oil do I use in my 6.4L or 6.2L Supercharged engine? pg. 215
How often should I change my engine’s oil? pg. 216
How often should I change my SRT engine’s oil? pg. 224
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
253
What should my tire pressure be set at? pg. 239
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
254
Accessories ...............252
Mopar ................252
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Off ..................73
On ..................73
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise
Control) ................72
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . .216
Adding Washer Fluid ..........216
Additives, Fuel .............248
Adjust
Down .................51
Forward ...............51
Rearward ...............51
Up ..................51
Aftermarket ................4
AirBag..................30
Advance Front Air Bag .......30
Air Bag Operation ..........31
Air Bag Warning Light ........28
Driver Knee Air Bag .........32
Enhanced Accident Response .36, 201
Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . .201
Front Air Bag ............30
If A Deployment Occurs .......36
Knee Impact Bolsters ........32
Maintaining Your Air Bag System .37
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light .29
Side Air Bags ............32
Transporting Pets ..........49
Air Bag Light............28, 176
Air Bag Maintenance ..........37
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner
Filter) ................216
Air Conditioner Maintenance .....216
Air Conditioning ........87, 89, 90
Air Conditioning Refrigerant ......216
Air Conditioning System ........216
Alarm
Vehicle Security Alarm .......19
Alarm (Security Alarm) ......19, 180
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . .212, 216
Disposal ..............216
Anti-Lock Warning Light ........176
Appearance Care ............216
Arming System (Security Alarm) ....19
Assistance Towing ...........175
Audio Jack ............110, 123
Automatic Headlights ..........68
Automatic High Beams .......68, 69
Automatic Oil Change Indicator . . . .181
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) .89,
90
Air Recirculation ..........91
SYNC Temperature Button . . .88, 91
Automatic Transmission .........82
Adding Fluid . .213, 214, 215, 216
Fluid Type . . . .213, 214, 215, 216
Autostick
Operation ..............84
Axle Fluid ......213, 214, 215, 216
Axle Lubrication . . .213, 214, 215, 216
Battery ..............195, 216
Jump Starting ...........195
Location ..............195
Blind Spot Monitoring ..........80
Body Mechanism Lubrication .....216
Boost ..................173
B-Pillar Location ............239
Brake Fluid .....213, 214, 215, 216
Brakes .................216
Brake System .............216
Fluid Check . . .213, 214, 215, 216
Master Cylinder ..........216
Warning Light ...........178
Braking .................159
SRT.................159
Braking Distance ............159
SRT.................159
Break-In Recommendations, New
Vehicle ................63
Bulb Replacement ...........248
Bulbs, Light ..............248
Calibration, Compass .........157
Camera, Rear ..............79
Canada ...............4,251
Capacities, Fluid ............212
Caps, Filler
Oil (Engine) ............216
Car Washes ...............216
Change Oil Indicator ..........181
Changing A Flat Tire ..........183
Charging System Light.........175
Chart, Tire Sizing............237
INDEX
Child Restraint..............38
Child Restraints
Booster Seats ............40
Child Restraints ...........38
Child Seat Installation ........47
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat
Belt ..................45
Infants And Child Restraints ....39
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Chil-
dren .................41
Older Children And Child Restraints .40
Seating Positions ..........41
Cleaning
Wheels ............216, 244
Windshield Wiper Blades .....216
Climate Control .........87, 89, 90
Clock ..................108
Cluster Warning/Indicator Lights
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light . . .176
Brake Warning Light ........178
Charging System Light ......175
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Indi-
cator Light .............176
Engine Temperature Warning Light
...................177
Front Fog Light Indicator .....180
High Beam Indicator .......180
Oil Pressure Warning Light . . . .175
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) Light ...........176
Turn Signal Indicator .......179
Vehicle Security Light .......180
Clutch .................216
Clutch Fluid ..............216
Compact Spare Tire ..........243
Compass Calibration ..........157
Cooling System.............216
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . .216
Coolant Capacity .........212
Coolant Level ...........216
Disposal Of Used Coolant .....216
Drain, Flush, And Refill ......216
Inspection .............216
Points To Remember .......216
Pressure Cap ...........216
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) .212,
213, 214, 215, 216
Corrosion Protection ..........216
Customer Assistance.......250, 251
Customer Programmable Features . .161
Deck Lid, Emergency Release .....15
Deck Lid, Power Release ........15
Defects, Reporting ...........251
Defroster, Rear Window .........87
Defroster, Windshield ..........87
Dimmer Control ...........68, 69
Dimmer Switch, Headlight .....68, 69
Disabled Vehicle Towing .....175, 199
Disarming, Security System .......20
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . .216
Disturb .................154
Door Locks ................13
Drive Modes ...........161, 169
Driver Information Display
Controls ...............157
DID .................157
E-85 Fuel................248
Electronic Power Distribution Center
(Fuses) ...............231
Electronics.................4
Your Vehicle's Sound System ....94
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise
Control)..............69, 70
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . .178
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF
Indicator...............181
Electronic Throttle Control Warning
Light.................176
Emergencies, What To Do In .....175
Emergency ...............175
Emergency Deck Lid Release ......15
Emergency, In Case Of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . .200
Jacking ...............183
Jump Starting ........195, 197
Overheating ............182
Towing ............175, 199
Emergency Key .............13
Emergency Trunk Release ........15
Engine .................173
Air Cleaner .............216
Break-In Recommendations ....63
Checking Oil Level .........216
INDEX
Compartment . .204, 206, 208, 210
Coolant (Antifreeze) . .213, 214, 215
Cooling ...............216
Jump Starting ........195, 197
Oil .....212, 213, 214, 215, 216
Oil Change Interval ........181
Oil Filler Cap ...........216
Oil Selection .........212, 216
Overheating ............182
Starting ...............18
Stopping ..............18
Temperature Warning Light . . . .177
Engine Break-In
3.6L .................63
5.7L .................64
6.2L .................66
6.4L .................65
Enhanced Accident Response Feature.36,
201
Ethanol .................248
Exhaust System ............216
FAQ...................253
Filters
Air Cleaner .............216
Engine Oil . . . .213, 214, 215, 216
Engine Oil Disposal ........216
Flashers
Turn Signal ............179
Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Fuel Requirements ........248
Fluid, Brake .....213, 214, 215, 216
Fluid Capacities ............212
Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts.213
, 215
Fog Lights .............68, 180
Folding Rear Seat ............56
Forward Collision Warning........76
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ........200
Frequently Asked Questions ......253
Fuel
Additives ..............248
Ethanol ..............248
Filler Door Emergency Release . .247
Filler Door (Gas Cap) .......246
Materials Added ..........248
Octane Rating .....213, 214, 215
Specifications .....213, 214, 215
Tank Capacity ...........212
Fuel, Flexible ..............248
Fuses ..................231
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink).162, 164
Gauge..................173
SRT.................173
General Maintenance .........216
G-Force ..............160, 173
SRT..............160, 173
Glass Cleaning .............216
Hands-Free Phone (Uconnect) . . . .148
Headlamp ..............67, 68
Headlights
Automatic ..............68
Cleaning ..............216
Dimmer Switch .........68, 69
High Beam ...........67, 68
Head Restraints ...........49, 50
Head Rests .............49, 50
Heated Mirrors ...........88, 91
Heated Seats ..............57
High Beam Indicator..........180
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer)
Switch ..............67, 68
Home ..................172
HomeLink
Operation ..............164
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener).162, 164
Hood Release .............202
Horsepower...............173
Instrument Cluster ............8
Instrument Cluster Warning Lights . .175
Instrument Panel Cover ........216
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . .216
Interior And Instrument Lights ......7
Interior Appearance Care .......216
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) . . .67
Introduction ................3
Aftermarket Electronics ........4
Canada ................4
iPod/USB/MP3 Control
Bluetooth Streaming Audio . . . .148
Jack Location..............183
Jack Operation .............183
INDEX
Jump Starting ..........195, 197
KeyFob...............11, 12
392 .................12
Base .................11
Black Key ..............12
Function ...............11
Hellcat ................12
Lock The Doors ...........13
RedKey ...............12
SRT..................12
Unlock The Doors ..........13
Keyless Enter-N-Go ...........16
Accessory Postition .........19
Automatic Trans ...........18
Engine Starting ...........18
Engine Stopping ...........18
Lock The Vehicle’s Doors ......13
Lock/Unlock ..........16, 17
Starting/Stopping ..........18
Lane Change Assist ...........67
LaneSense ................78
Lap History ...............160
SRT.................160
Lap/Shoulder Belts ...........22
Lap Timer................160
SRT.................160
Light Bulbs ...............248
Lights
AirBag ...............28
Fog .................180
High Beam Indicator .......180
Interior ................69
Low Fuel ..............175
Security Alarm ...........180
Service ...............248
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) .176
Loading Vehicle
Tires ................239
Locks
Door .................13
Lubrication, Body ...........216
Maintaining Your Vehicle .......202
Maintenance ..............202
Maintenance Free Battery .......216
Maintenance, General ......202, 216
Maintenance Procedures .......216
Maintenance Record.......222, 229
Maintenance Schedule . .216, 224, 226
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check
Engine) ...............179
Master Cylinder (Brakes)........216
Media Center Radio ..........114
Memory Feature (Memory Seat).....52
Memory Seat...............52
Memory Seats And Radio ........52
Mirrors
Heated .............88, 91
Mopar..................252
MOPAR Accessories ..........252
Navigation ............131, 135
New Vehicle Break-In Period ......63
Occupant Restraints...........20
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) .213, 214,
215
Oil Change Indicator ..........181
Oil Change Indicator, Reset ......181
Oil, Engine ......213, 214, 215, 216
Capacity ..............212
Change Interval .......181, 216
Checking ..............216
Disposal ..............216
Filter .......213, 214, 215, 216
Filter Disposal ...........216
Materials Added To ........216
Recommendation ......212, 216
Viscosity ...........212, 216
Oil Filter, Selection...........216
Oil Pressure Light ...........175
Outlet
Power ...............164
Overheating, Engine ..........182
Paint Care ...............216
Panic Alarm ...............13
ParkSense System, Rear ........80
Performance ...........157, 172
Personalized Menu Bar ........119
Pets ...................49
Phone, Hands-Free (Uconnect) . . . .148
Phone (Pairing).............150
Phone (Uconnect) ........115, 148
INDEX
Pinch Protection .............92
Placard, Tire And Loading Information.239
, 240
Power
Deck Lid Release ..........15
Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . .233
Glass Sunroof ............91
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) .164
Seats ................51
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column .61
Power Seats
Down .................51
Forward ...............51
Power Lumbar ............52
Rearward ...............51
Recline ................51
Up ..................51
Power Steering Fluid.213, 214, 215, 216
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts ....26
Preparation For Jacking ........185
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ..............26
Programmable Electronic Features . .161,
170
Radio ............96, 107, 113
Balance and Fade .........108
Equalizer ..............108
Operation ..............109
Presets ...............119
Setting the Clock ..........108
Radio Screens .............117
Radio (Sound Systems) . . .96, 107, 113
Rain Sensitive Wiper System ......67
Rear Camera ...............79
Rear Cross Path .............80
Rear ParkSense System .........80
Rear Seat, Folding............56
Recreational Towing ..........168
Refrigerant ...............216
Reminder, Seat Belt ...........21
Remote Control
Trunk Release ............13
Remote Keyless Entry
Lock The Doors ...........13
Unlock The Doors ..........13
Remote Starting
Enter Remote Start Mode ......14
Exit Remote Start Mode ......14
How To Use Remote Start ......14
KeyFob ...............14
Remote Starting System ......14
Remote Starting System ........14
Remote Trunk Release..........15
Replacement Bulbs ..........248
Reporting Safety Defects .......251
Resetting Oil Change Indicator . . . .181
Restraint, Head ...........49, 50
Restraints, Child .............38
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck .....200
Safety Information, Tire ........236
Schedule, Maintenance .....216, 224
Seat Belt
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt An-
chorage ...............24
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) .26
Energy Management Feature ....26
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation ....24
Lap/Shoulder Belts .........22
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ....24
Pregnant Women ..........26
Seat Belt Extender .........25
Seat Belt Pretensioner .......26
Seat Belt Reminder .........21
Seat Belt Maintenance ........216
Seat Belt Reminder ...........21
Seat Belts ................21
Adjustable Shoulder Belt ......24
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage
....................24
Child Restraint ...........38
Extender ...............25
Front Seat .........21, 22, 24
Operating Instructions .......24
Pregnant Women ..........26
Pretensioners ............26
Rear Seat ..............22
Untwisting Procedure ........24
Seats.................51, 58
Adjustment .............51
Easy Entry ..............55
Head Restraints ........49, 50
Heated .............57, 58
Height Adjustment .........51
Memory ...............52
INDEX
Power ................51
Rear Folding ............56
Seatback Release ..........56
Tilting ................51
Vented ................59
Ventilated ..............59
Security Alarm .............180
Security Alarm ............19
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . .213,
214, 215
Shoulder Belts ..............22
Signals, Turn............67, 179
Sirius Satellite Radio ......110, 121
Traffic & Weather ..........135
SIRIUS Travel Link...........135
SiriusXM Guardian............98
Account ...............98
In Vehicle Features .........101
Maintaining Your Account .....101
Mobile App ..........100, 144
Registration .............99
Remote Features ..........104
Renewing Subscriptions ......101
Send&Go .............100
Vehicle Finder ...........100
Vehicle Health Alert ........144
Sound Systems (Radio) . .96, 107, 123,
131
Spare Tire .........183, 243, 244
Spark Plugs ........213, 214, 215
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) . . . .213, 214, 215
Oil ...........213, 214, 215
Speed ...........158, 159, 160
Speed Control
Accel/Decel ...........71, 72
Accel/Decel (ACC Only) .......73
Cancel ................70
Distance Setting (ACC Only) ....75
Mode Setting (ACC Only) ......75
Resume ...............71
Set ..................70
Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . .69, 70
SRT
Engine ...............173
Gauge ...............173
G-Force ............160, 173
Home ................172
Lap History .............160
Timers ......158, 159, 160, 172
Top Speed .............160
SRT Performance Features ......170
Starting
Remote ...............14
Steering
Column Lock ............61
Tilt Column .............61
Wheel, Heated ...........60
Wheel, Tilt ..............61
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . .156
Stuck, Freeing .............200
Sunroof
Closing ................92
Opening ...............91
Venting ................91
Sun Roof .................91
Supplemental Restraint System - Air
Bag..................30
Telescoping Steering Column ......61
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC).89,
90
Text Messaging..........116, 154
Tilt Steering Column...........61
Timers ........158, 159, 160, 172
SRT .......158, 159, 160, 172
Tire And Loading Information Placard.239,
240
Tire Markings ..............236
Tires .........174, 242, 243, 245
Air Pressure ............239
Changing ..........183, 189
Compact Spare ..........243
Flat Changing ...........189
General Information .174, 242, 243
Jacking ...........183, 185
Load Capacity ........239, 240
Quality Grading ..........245
Replacement ...........189
Safety ...............236
Sizes ................237
Spare Tire .......183, 243, 244
Wheel Mounting ..........189
Tire Safety Information.........236
Tire Service Kit.189, 190, 191, 192, 194
, 195
INDEX
Top Speed ............160, 173
SRT.................160
Torque .................173
Towing .................167
Disabled Vehicle ..........199
Recreational ............168
Towing Vehicle Behind A Motorhome .168
Trailer Towing
Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . .167
Trailer Weight..............167
Transfer Case
Fluid ..........213, 214, 215
Transmission
Automatic ..............82
Fluid .......213, 214, 215, 216
Maintenance ............216
Transporting Pets ............49
Trunk Lid (Deck Lid)...........15
Trunk Release, Emergency .......15
Trunk Release Remote Control .....15
Turn Signals ............67, 179
Uconnect 5.0 .............107
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV ........117
Helpful Tips For Bluetooth .....155
Mute ................153
Phonebook .............153
Transfer Ongoing Call Between Hand-
set And Vehicle ...........153
Voice Recognition Tips .......153
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Voice Recognition
Register ...............143
SiriusXM Guardian .........142
Uconnect (Hands-Free Phone)
Making A Phone Call . . . .148, 153
Receiving A Call ..........148
Uconnect Phone ......148, 153, 154
Uconnect Voice Command.111, 112, 113
, 114, 115, 116, 136, 153
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ......245
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ....24
USB Port .............110, 123
Vehicle Loading ............240
Vehicle User Guide
ICON Symbol Glossary .......10
In Vehicle Help ...........10
IVH..................10
Navigation ..............10
Operating Instructions ........10
Searching User Guide ........10
Voice Command. . .111, 112, 113, 114,
115, 116, 153
Voice Recognition System (VR).111, 112,
113, 114, 115, 116, 136, 153, 154
Washer
Adding Fluid ............216
Washers, Windshield ..........67
Washing Vehicle ............216
Wheel And Wheel Trim .....216, 244
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care. . .216, 244
Wind Buffeting..............92
Windshield Washers ...........67
Windshield Wiper Blades .......216
Windshield Wipers ............67
Wiper Blade Replacement .......216
INDEX